Top Banner
Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 1 Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics Tom Cunningham Rev. 4.3, November 2001
387

SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Apr 27, 2015

Download

Documents

amidoron
Welcome message from author
This document is posted to help you gain knowledge. Please leave a comment to let me know what you think about it! Share it to your friends and learn new things together.
Transcript
Page 1: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 1

Introduction to

Semiconductor Device Physics

Tom Cunningham

Rev. 4.3, November 2001

Page 2: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 2

Introduction to

Semiconductor Device Physics

A user-friendly introduction to semiconductor device physics

and digital CMOS circuits

Page 3: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 3

Course Description:

This course provides a user-friendly introduction to semiconductor device physics, geared toward applications in digital microelectronics. It starts from basic principles of chemistry and physics, and builds up in a stepwise fashion to an in-depth understanding of how transistors work and how they can be combined to make digital circuits – logic as well as memory. The focus is MOSFET/CMOS technology, though the principles are applicable to other semiconductor devices and technologies as well. This courseconsists of five modules:

1. Electronic Properties of Silicon

2. The PN Junction

3. The MOS Capacitor

4. The MOSFET

5. Small Circuits

In the first module, we study the electronic properties of silicon (and other semiconductors), including pure silicon and doped (N-type and P-type) silicon, to understand what semiconductors are and how they behave. In the second module we study the junction formed by N-type and P-type silicon (called a PN Junction) because it is an important step toward understanding the transistor (specifically, the source and drain regions of a MOSFET), and because it is an important semiconductor device in its own right – a diode. In the third module, we study the MOS capacitor; this too is an important step toward understanding the transistor (specifically, the gate region of a MOSFET), and an important device in its own right. In the fourth module, we combine the concepts of the previous modules to understand how transistors work (specifically, N-channel and P-channel MOSFETs). In the fifth module, we learn about CMOS technology, and how transistors can be interconnected into small circuits, such as logic circuits (e.g. basic logic gates) and memory circuits (specifically SRAM, DRAM, and Flash EEPROM cells). We will also have a high-level overview of how a complex chip, like a microprocessor, is born – from design and layout to manufacture and test.

Course Goals:

• Understand what a semiconductor is and how transistors work, in detail. This is the primary goal of the course, to which the most time and detail are devoted.

• Illustrate how transistors can be used to build basic CMOS logic and memory circuits, and how complex integrated circuits like a microprocessor are born – from design andlayout to manufacture and test.

What This Course is NOT: In the context of understanding how transistors work, we will discuss some aspects of how integrated circuits are fabricated; however this course is not about silicon processing per se. Similarly, we will discuss some aspects of device testing, but will not provide a comprehensive introduction to this subject. The material on logic and memory circuits (module 5) is intended to illustrate the relevance of the first four modules and address some big-picture topics of interest; it is not intended to be a complete introduction to circuit design. Other courses can be taken on these topics. This course provides the technical foundation for all of them.

Target Audience: This course is intended for scientists and engineers in various disciplines who would benefit from a good introduction to, or refresher course in, semiconductor device physics. The typical audience consists of fab process and yield engineers, circuit designers (custom and ASIC), and validation and test engineers.

Prerequisites: A background in basic chemistry and physics is assumed, such as first-year college courses in these subjects. Knowledge of digital electronics, modern physics, and/or calculus will be advantageous but is not required. Experience in IC design, fabrication, or testing is also an advantage. Mathematics is an integral (no pun intended) part of this course, but is kept to a healthy minimum.

Page 4: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 4

1

Electronic Properties of

Silicon

Page 5: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 5

This is the first module in a five-module introduction to semiconductor device physics. The modules are:

1. Electronic Properties of Silicon

2. The PN Junction

3. The MOS Capacitor

4. The MOSFET

5. Small Circuits

The purpose of this module is to study the electronic properties of silicon (and other semiconductors), to understand what a semiconductor is and how they behave. We will begin by studying pure silicon, and then move on to study doped silicon – N-type and P-type.

The objectives of this module are:

• Understand the covalent bonding of silicon atoms

• Understand the energy band diagram – conduction band, valence band, and band gap

• Understand thermal generation and recombination

• Understand the charge carriers in a semiconductor – electrons and holes

• Understand the conduction properties of pure (intrinsic) silicon

• Understand the bonding diagram, band diagram, and conduction properties of N-type silicon

• Understand the bonding diagram, band diagram, and conduction properties of P-type silicon

• Understand the meaning and importance of the Fermi distribution and the Fermi energy level

Looking Ahead: After studying the electronic behavior of N-type and P-type silicon in this module, we will combine these concepts in the next module to understand the physics of the PN Junction.

Page 6: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 6

n=1

n=2

n=3

valence electrons (4)(outermost shell)

Si14

H1

Li3

Na11

K19

Rb37

Ca20

Sr38

Sc21

Y39

Ti22

Zr40

V23

Nb41

Cr24

Mo42

Mn25

Tc43

Fe26

Ru44

Be4

Mg12

Co27

Rh45

Ni28

Pd46

Cu29

Ag47

Zn30

Cd48

Ga31

In49

Ge32

Sn50

As33

Sb51

Se34

Te52

Br35

I53

Kr36

Xe54

B5

Al13

C6

Si14

N7

P15

O8

S16

F9

Cl17

Ne10

Ar18

He2

He2

I II III IV V VI VII VIII

28.0855

nucleus

core electrons (10)(inner shells)

Silicon - Atomic Structure

Periodic Table of Elements(abridged)

1s22s22p63s23p2

Atomic Number(Z)

Atomic Mass [amu]

Page 7: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 7

Silicon is the semiconductor of choice for the modern digital microelectronics industry. (The reasons for this will be presented in module 4, when we are in a better position to discuss them.) We will begin by studying the electronic properties of silicon to understand what a semiconductor is.

Silicon has atomic number Z = 14 on the Periodic Table of Elements, indicating that the Si atom has 14 protons in its nucleus and 14 electrons surrounding the nucleus. Using Bohr’s “planetary” model of the atom, the four electrons in the outermost orbit or “shell” are the valence electrons; the other ten are core electrons. Note that Si resides in column 4 of the Periodic Table, and therefore has four valence electrons. The valence electrons participate in chemical bonding.

Page 8: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 8

Si

Si

Si

Si

Si Si

Si

Si

Si

Pure Silicon - Bonding Diagram

covalentbond

Si

nucleus + core electrons

valence electron

Silicon Atom

Schematic Diagram of Covalent Bonding in Silicon(T = 0 K)

Page 9: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 9

Those elements in column 8 of the Periodic Table are called the noble gasses; they have a full outer shell (8 valence electrons). The noble gas structure is the lowest energy configuration, hence the noble gasses are chemically inert.

Other, “non-noble” atoms will form chemical bonds in order to approximate the noble gas structure. Silicon forms covalent bonds as shown schematically; by sharing valence electrons with nearest neighbors, each Si atom is surrounded by eight valence electrons, like a noble gas. These bonds hold the atoms together to form a solid, and play a key role in the electronic properties of the material as well.

Page 10: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 10

Pure Silicon - Energy Band Diagram

Si

Si

Si

Si

Si SiEl

ectro

n En

ergy

EC

EV

Ei EG = 1.1 eV

Bonding Diagram(T = 0 K)

Energy Band Diagram(T = 0 K)

1.1 eV

0 eV

Valence Band

Conduction Band

Page 11: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 11

Energy band diagrams are very useful for studying what the electrons inside a semiconductor material are doing. The vertical axis represents electron energy. The horizontal axis represents distance or position (x) in the semiconductor sample. An electron in a chemical bond resides in the valence band on this diagram (the top of the valence band EV is usually taken to be the zero of the energy scale, which is a conventional but arbitrary choice).

At absolute zero* all of the electrons are in the valence band.

The Fermi energy level, EF, will be introduced later. Ei is the Fermi level in pure (aka. intrinsic) Si, and hence is called the intrinsic Fermi level; it is near the middle of the band gap.

* Technical Aside: Absolute zero (0 Kelvin = -273 oC) is the theoretical minimum of temperature, i.e. as “cold” as an object or material can possibly get. It is sometimes described as the temperature at which all molecular motion ceases, though perhaps a more precise definition (from the standpoint of quantum physics) is that absolute zero is the temperature at which no thermal energy whatsoever is available to, or extractable from, the system. Real objects/materials can approach absolute zero asymptotically in a laboratory setting, but never reach it. It is, however, a very useful concept for discussing the behavior of a material in the absence of thermal energy.

Page 12: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 12

Si

Si

Si

Si

Si Si

Si

Si

Si

Bonding Diagram(Low Temperature)

E

EC

EV

Ei EG = 1.1eV

Energy Band Diagram(Low Temperature)

thermalgeneration(electron -hole pair)

hole

freeelectron

hole

freeelectron

Pure Silicon - Thermal Generation (Low Temp)

n = concentration of electronsin conduction band (cm-3)

p = concentration of holesin valence band (cm-3)

n = p = ni

Page 13: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 13

At temperatures above absolute zero, thermal generation takes place - i.e. an electron gains enough energy to break out of the covalent bond and becomes free to roam about inside the solid. This leaves behind a hole (vacancy) in the bond. Thus, thermal generation is said to create electron-hole pairs.

Thermal generation is also depicted in the band diagram. The electron traverses the band gap and resides in the conduction band. A hole is left in the valence band. For silicon, the band gap is 1.1 eV, meaning that the electron must gain at least this much energy to break free from the covalent bond. If it has less than this, it can not break free from the bond, and remains in the valence band on the band diagram. Hence, electrons are not found inside the band gap; they reside in either the valence band or the conduction band. The band gap can be thought of as forbidden energy states for the electrons.

Because free electrons and holes are created in pairs, the concentration of free electrons in the conduction band n (electrons / cm3) is equal to the concentration of holes in the valence band p (holes / cm3). The intrinsic carrier concentration ni is equal to the number of electron-hole pairs, i.e. n = p = ni for pure silicon.

Page 14: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 14

Si

Si

Si

Si

Si Si

Si

Si

Si

Bonding Diagram(Room Temperature)

E

EC

EV

Ei EG = 1.1eV

Energy Band Diagram(Room Temperature)

n = concentration of electronsin conduction band (cm-3)

p = concentration of holesin valence band (cm-3)

Pure Silicon - Thermal Generation (Room Temp)

n = p = ni

Page 15: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 15

As the temperature increases, more thermal generation takes place, hence n and p increase.

Page 16: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 16

Si

Si

Si

Si

Si Si

Si

Si

Si

Bonding Diagram(High Temperature)

E

EC

EV

Ei EG = 1.1eV

Energy Band Diagram(High Temperature)

n = concentration of electronsin conduction band (cm-3)

p = concentration of holesin valence band (cm-3)

Pure Silicon - Thermal Generation (High Temp)

n = p = ni

Page 17: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 17

At a high temperature, there is a lot of thermal generation.

(Note: When the temperature reaches the melting point, so many covalent bonds will be broken that the solid will not be able tohold together, and the material will become liquid. Silicon has a melting point of about 1400 oC. In this course, we will concern ourselves only with temperatures well below the melting point.)

Page 18: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 18

Aside: A Closer Look at Covalent Bonds

U(r)

req

Si Si

r

Si Si

req

coulombic repulsionof nuclei

isolatedatoms

r

U(r)

r

rqqrU

o

21

41)(πε

=

Si nucleus

r

barrier lowering

electron in coulombic potential well of nucleus

n = 1

n = 2

n = 3

equilibriumbond length

req

Si nucleus

Si nucleus

electron in coulombic potential well of two nuclei (covalent bond)

Page 19: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 19

The top diagram shows two silicon atoms as they are brought closer to each other. Their separation distance (r) is plotted against the potential energy of the system, U(r). When the atoms are far apart (isolated), they have no interaction and the net potential energy is zero. As they are brought closer together, their valence electrons start to interact and form a covalent bond; this bond is energetically favorable, and the total potential energy of the system is reduced. (Recall that, in general, nature favors lowerenergy.) There is some equilibrium separation (the “valley” on the energy plot) that represents the equilibrium bond length (at a given temperature). If the atoms are pushed closer together than this, a sharp rise in the potential energy of the system occurs due to the coulombic repulsion of the (positively-charged) nuclei.

The bottom diagram shows the potential energy of an electron in an atom, due to the coulombic attraction between the positively-charged nucleus (protons) and the negatively-charged electron. The potential energy goes as 1/r, where r is the separation between the electron and the nucleus (determined by which shell the electron is in). Thus, we can say that the electron is in a coulombic potential energy “well”, as shown on the diagram.

When two atoms are brought together to form a covalent bond, the electron in the bond now feels the attraction of both nuclei, and thus it has a lower potential energy. The energy “barrier” is lowered in the region between the two nuclei, and the electron can be shared between the two. Thus, the covalent bond is formed, and holds the two atoms together.

Page 20: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 20

Aside: Where the Band Gap Comes FromSi Si Si Si

n =1

n =2

n =3Electron energylevels of isolatedatoms

Levels split whenatoms form bond

Si electron configuration:1s22s22p63s23p2

req

r

Page 21: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 21

The electrons in an atom occupy different energy levels. When two atoms are brought together to form a covalent bond, these levels split. (This is required by the Pauli Exclusion Principle, which says that no two electrons in an interacting system can have the same quantum numbers.)

For an assemblage of N silicon atoms, N-way splitting will occur (in a real sample N is very large – e.g. there are 5x1022 Si atoms/cm3). This is shown for the case of silicon in the diagram. At the far right of the graph, the silicon atoms are isolated (their separation is large). As they are brought together to their equilibrium separation, band splitting occurs as shown, resulting in the conduction band, valence band, and band gap. (Because there are so many energy levels and they are so closely spaced, each band can be treated as a continuum of energies.)

Note from the electron configuration and the diagram that the valence band is full of electrons (contains all the valence electrons, i.e. the 3s2sp2 electrons), and the conduction band is empty – this of course is at absolute zero, where there is no thermal generation taking place.

Page 22: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 22

Aside: Inside a Semiconductor

Si Si Si Si

EG

EC

EV

tunneling

Page 23: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 23

Combining the concepts from the previous two slides.

Note that the movement of electrons in the valence band is carried out via tunneling*. A hole must exist on the other side of the barrier for the electron to tunnel into (which is equivalent to the hole tunneling in the opposite direction). We will discuss carrier motion later in more detail when we discuss conduction.

* Technical Aside: Tunneling is a central concept in modern physics (but having no analog in classical physics). Tunneling refers to the transport of a particle (like an electron) across or through a potential energy barrier even though that particle does not have sufficient energy to overcome that barrier according to classical physics. In the example presented here, the electron does not have enough energy to travel over the potential energy “hill” shown in the diagram, and hence according to classical physics it can not get to the other side of the barrier. But according to modern physics, under the right conditions the electron can tunnel through the barrier to the other side. Despite its somewhat esoteric and counterintuitive nature, the phenomenon of tunneling has a sound theoretical foundation, and has been experimentally observed in a wide variety of physical systems. We will encounter this concept several times during this course.

Page 24: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 24

Fermi Function & Fermi Level

f(E)

E

T = 0 K

T1

T2

0 < T1 < T2

f EE E

k TF

B

( )exp

=+ −

1

1

Fermi Function

0

1

1/2

EFE = electron energyEF = Fermi energy levelkB = Boltzmann constant = 8.617x10-5 eV/K = 1.381x10-23 J/KT = Temperature (K)kBT = thermal energy = 0.260 eV at 300 K

Page 25: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 25

Thermal generation is a statistical process, i.e. it is not possible to predict whether a particular electron will be promoted to the conduction band or not, but it is possible to predict statistically how many (or what percentage) of a large population will be promoted. The Fermi function is used for this purpose. Derived based on Fermi-Dirac statistics, the Fermi function f(E) gives the probability of finding an electron at energy E.* Hence, it takes on values in the range 0 to 1 (i.e. 0% to 100%).

EF is the Fermi energy or Fermi level. It is the “pivot-point” of the tail of the distribution, and the length of the tail is determined by the temperature T. Note from the equation that the probability of finding an electron at the Fermi energy (E = EF) is always 50% (regardless of temperature). Think of the Fermi level as a “water mark” for the electron energies. It will prove to be a very important quantity in the foregoing discussion.

* Technically, f(E) is the probability of finding the electron in some energy interval E to E + dE, where dE is an infinitesimal increment in energy.

Page 26: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 26

Density of States

g(E)

E0

EEg ~)(

32

32

)(*2*)(

)(*2*)(

π

π

EEmmEg

EEmmEg

Vppv

Cnnc

−=

−= E ≥ EC

E ≤ EV

conduction band:

valence band:

[ ]

∞−

−=

=

V

V

C

EE

c

dEEgEfp

dEEgEfn

)()(1

)()(

carrier concentrations:≡ h/2π= 1.055x10-34 J•sh = Planck’s constant = 4.136x10-15 eV.s = 6.626x10-34 J.smn

* = Electron effective massmp

* =Hole effective mass

Page 27: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 27

The Fermi function gives the probability of finding an electron at energy E, but it doesn’t tell us whether (or how many) available energy states exist at that energy. The density of states function, g(E), is derived from a quantum-mechanical treatment of the conduction/valence bands, and approximates the number of energy states per unit volume at energy E. *

The probability of finding an electron at energy E is given by f(E)*g(E). Integrating f(E)*g(E) over the conduction band energy range gives n, the total concentration of electrons in the conduction band. (Note that since the Fermi function goes to zero beyond the Fermi level, it is possible to make the integral unbounded at the upper end, thus simplifying the integration.)

Since the probability of finding an electron at energy E is given by f(E), it follows that the probability of finding a hole (vacancy) at energy E is given by 1 – f(E). Integrating [1-f(E)]*g(E) over the valence band energy range gives p, the total concentration of holes in the valence band.

The quantities mn* and mp* are the electron and hole effective mass, respectively (numeric values are provided later in this module). Newton’s second law of motion for an electron in free space is F = m0a (where F is the force acting on the electron, m0 is the mass of the electron in free space, and a is the acceleration of the electron). For an electron inside a semiconductor, the analogous expression is F = mn*a, where mn* is the effective mass (particular to the semiconductor material).

The mass of a hole may seem like a contradiction of terms at this point. We will clarify it shortly.

For our purposes, we are less interested in the mathematical details of the expression for g(E), and more interested in the general shape of the curve, specifically the observation that that g(E) goes as the square root of energy E.

* Technically, g(E) is the density of available energy states in some energy interval E to E + dE, where dE is an infinitesimal increment in energy. Rarely does one plug in numeric values to calculate f(E) and g(E) themselves; the expressions for f(E) and g(E) are used primarily in derivations of other quantities (e.g. deriving expressions for the carrier concentrations by finding closed-form solutions for the integrals shown above).

Page 28: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 28

SILICON STADIUM

g(E) = number of available energy states at energy E

f(E) = probability of finding an electron at energy E

f(E)*g(E) = number of electrons at energy E

f(E)*g(E) dE = total number of electrons in conduction band

g(E) = number of seats in row E

f(E) = probability of someone sitting in row E

f(E)*g(E) = number of people in row E

Σ f(E)*g(E) = total number of people in the visitors side of the stadium

EG(no seats)

EC

EV

visitors

home

Density of States - Analogy

Page 29: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 29

An analogy to help us understand the density of states, and how it is used.

The conduction and valence bands are like the home and visitor sections of a football stadium. Each row has a certain number ofseats (though all the rows do not necessarily have the same number of seats). There is some probability that a person will want to sit in a given row; like electrons preferring lower energies, fans tend to prefer the front rows. By multiplying the number of seats in a given row by the probability of someone wanting to sit in that row, the ticket agent can predict how many people total will be sitting in that row (on average). (Whereas the ticket agent would have to come up with a probability function of his own, perhaps based on historical data, we have the Fermi function.) By summing (integrating) this for all rows in the visitor section, the ticket agent can predict how many people total will sit in the visitor section (on average).

And similarly for the home section.

The field is like the band gap – there are no seats there, so people are not found sitting there; they may cross the field to the other side, but they do not sit on the field.

Page 30: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 30

The Relationship Between the Fermi Function,Density of States, and Carrier Concentrations

source: Pierret & Neudeck (editors), Modular Series on Solid State Devices, vol. 1, Addison-Wesley Publishing, 1988.

f(E)

1 - f(E)

Page 31: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 31

This slide shows graphically the relationship between the Fermi function, the density of states, and the electron and holeconcentrations for pure silicon. You can “visually” multiply the Fermi function and the density of states function together to generate the electron concentration shown. Repeat using [1 – f(E)] to generate the hole concentration.

Aside -- A Closer Look at Energy: We are now in a position to understand the energy band diagram in greater detail. The vertical axis E represents the total energy of the electron (potential energy + kinetic energy). EG = EC - EV represents the potential energy of the electron (with EV ≡ 0 we can simply say that EC represents the potential energy of the electron). The kinetic energy of the electron is then given by E – EC (the higher the electron is in the conduction band, the more kinetic energy it has). In other words, EC is the minimum amount of thermal energy the electron must acquire to break free from the bond (enter the conduction band), and any additional energy acquired by the electron becomes its kinetic energy. As for holes, the argumentis analogous. We will see shortly that hole energy increases in the downward direction on a band diagram, and it follows that the hole kinetic energy is |EV – E| (the deeper the hole is in the valence band, the more kinetic energy it has). Treating the hole as an independent positively-charged particle, it is easy to visualize what it means for a hole to have kinetic energy. Thinking of the hole as a bond vacancy, it means that an electron occupying an energy level down in the valence band was promoted to the conduction band. (Conservation of energy will require that the electron which fills this vacancy (during recombination) have sufficient kinetic energy to “balance the books”.) Try to relate these concepts: the temperature of the sample increases, more electrons are released from covalent bonds and with higher kinetic energy, the tail of the Fermi distribution pushes farther into the conduction band and the higher energy states become populated by these higher-kinetic-energy electrons. Meanwhile the 1-f(E)tail pushes farther into the valence band (by symmetry), releasing electrons from deeper energy levels, and thus the “books balance” and the total energy of the system is conserved.

Page 32: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 32

−=Tk

ENNnB

GVCi

2exp

=

=

hN

hN

Tkm

Tkm

BpV

BnC

22

22

*π2

*π2

2/3

2/3

+=**ln

43

2 n

pB

Gi

mmTkEE

n = p = ni

At 300 K:material mn*/mo mp*/mo ni (cm-3) EG (eV) Ei (eV)Si 1.18 0.81 1.18E10 1.12 0.5527Ge 0.55 0.36 2.33E13 0.66 0.3218GaAs 0.066 0.52 2.25E6 1.42 0.7501

intrinsic carrier concentration:

intrinsic Fermi level:

Pure (Intrinsic) Silicon - Useful Equations

where

EG = Energy band gapkB = Boltzmann constant = 8.617x10-5 eV/K = 1.381x10-23 J/KT = Temperature (K)kBT = thermal energy = 0.260 eV at 300 Kh = Planck’s constant = 4.136x10-15 eV.s = 6.626x10-34 J.smn

* = Electron effective massmp

* =Hole effective mass m0 = Mass of the electron (free space) = 9.1095x10-31 kg

Page 33: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 33

Performing the integrations on the previous slide yields expressions for n and p (not shown).

Given that np = ni2, these expressions can be combined to yield the expression above for the intrinsic carrier concentration. Note

that ni increases with increasing temperature, as expected. Note also that ni is larger for a semiconductor material with a smaller band gap, as expected.

These expressions for n and p can also be used to derive the above expression for the intrinsic Fermi energy, Ei.

Page 34: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 34

Intrinsic Carrier Concentration vs. Temperature

source: Pierret & Neudeck (editors), Modular Series on Solid State Devices, vol. 1, Addison-Wesley Publishing, 1988.

Page 35: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 35

Note the relationship between intrinsic carrier concentration, temperature, and band gap.

Page 36: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 36

Pure Silicon - Conduction

Si

Si

Si

Si

Si Si

Si

Si

Si

Conduction in Intrinsic SiBonding Diagram (T ~ 300 K)

EC

EV

EiEG

Conduction in Intrinsic SiEnergy Band Diagram (T ~ 300 K)

+-

-+qV

Si

V

+ -

I

electronsholes

+ -

Page 37: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 37

Conduction is the movement of charge through a material under the influence of an applied voltage (bias). This charge transport results in an electric current through the material.

At equilibrium* (i.e. when there is no voltage applied to the silicon sample), the electrons are in random thermal motion. There is no net transport of charge, and hence no current in the sample.

These diagrams describe how conduction takes place inside a semiconductor when a voltage is applied. Looking at the bonding diagram, we see that the free electrons are attracted to the positive terminal. The electrons in the covalent bonds are also attracted to the positive terminal, and use holes to facilitate their motion.

Conduction is also depicted in the energy band diagram. The bands are tilted by an amount qV (multiplying by q converts the voltage to energy), representing the voltage drop across the material – the more voltage applied, the steeper the bands. Electrons follow the energy gradient and “roll downhill” from higher energy (negative terminal) to lower energy (positive terminal). Notice again that, in the valence band, electrons “jump through holes” to facilitate their motion. Holes are required for conduction in the valence band; if there are no holes, the electrons can not move. The situation is analogous to beings stuck in traffic – you can not move forward until there is some vacancy in front of you to move into. If you are in a long line of traffic and there are no holes anywhere along the path, you have a traffic jam because nobody can move forward. The obvious corollary is that the more holes there are, the more conductive the sample is.

Notice that, in the valence band, an electron moving toward the positive terminal means that a hole is moving toward the negative terminal. In this sense, a hole can be treated as an independent, positively-charged particle. This mental construct is convenient, as it is easier to count the (relatively few) holes instead of the electrons when describing the valence band. We will adopt this model moving forward. Holes will be treated like independent, positively-charged particles that move under the influence of an applied voltage. We even assign an effective mass to the hole, as mentioned previously. Note that the electron and hole effective masses are not equal, and that the transportation mechanisms are not the same (specifically, carrier movement in the valence band takes place via tunneling, as discussed previously).

Hence, conduction is carried out by electrons in the conduction band and holes in the valence band. Each contributes to the current through the sample. The larger nand p are, the more conductive the sample is.

Current due to an applied electric field (voltage) is called drift current. The electric field vector is superimposed on the random thermal motion of the carriers (electrons and holes). Although they maintain their disorderly thermal motion, they will tend to “drift” in the direction dictated by the electric field, resulting in a net migration of charge and hence a current.

* Note: To be specific, equilibrium means: (1) no applied voltage; (2) no electric or magnetic fields present; (3) thermal equilibrium (no thermal gradients in the device); (4) no mechanical stress; (5) no external sources of excitation (e.g. no light or radiation).

Page 38: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 38

Pure Silicon - Conduction, A Closer Look . . .

Si

V

+ -

I

electronsholes

+ -

Si

Si

Si

Si

Si Si

Si

Si

Si

hole conduction(in valence band)

electron conduction(in conduction band)

EV

hole

time

EV

EV

EV

electronsholes

Page 39: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 39

In the valence band, electrons moving toward the positive terminal means that holes are moving toward the negative terminal (thedirection a positive charge would move). Therefore, we can treat holes like independent, positively-charged particles inside the semiconductor. This key concept is reiterated here because it will be used throughout the rest of the course.

Note that, because the electrons are “rolling downhill” in response to the band bending (energy gradient), holes are moving “uphill”. Therefore, whereas electron energy increases going upward on a band diagram, it follows that hole energy increases in the downward direction on the band diagram. An easy way to remember this is that electrons like to “sink” and holes like to “float” on a band diagram. Given the opportunity, electrons will roll downhill, and holes will “roll uphill”.

Page 40: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 40

Pure Silicon - Conduction (con’t)conductivity (σσσσ)

σ σ σ σ = qµµµµnn + qµµµµpp = qni(µµµµn+µµµµp)q = elementary charge = 1.602x10-19 coul.µn = electron mobility [= 1350 cm2/(V.s) for Si, room temp.]µp = hole mobility [= 480 cm2/(V.s) for Si, room temp.]

(Ω.cm)−1(Ω.cm)

resistivity (ρρρρ)

(Ω)

L = length of sample(cm)A = cross-sectional area of sample (cm2)

resistance (R)

R LA

= ρ

Ohm’s Law

V = I RV = applied voltage (volts)I = current (amps)

RSi

V

+-

I

electronsholesI

(am

ps)

V (volts)

slope = 1/R

A

ρρρρLA

Si

σρ 1 =

Page 41: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 41

The conductivity (σ) of a material is a measure of how readily it conducts current. Materials with a high conductivity (e.g. metals) are good conductors.

Resistivity (ρ) is the reciprocal of conductivity. Hence, a material with a high conductivity has a low resistivity.

Note that the conductivity and resistivity are inherent properties of the material itself; they do not take into account the size or shape of the sample.

The quantities µn and µp are the electron and hole mobility, respectively. The mobility is a measure of how easily the carrier can move through the material in response to an applied electric field (voltage) - a high mobility is desirable for good conduction. Note that the electron mobility is higher than the hole mobility in general. Mobility is discussed in more detail in the next slide.

The resistance (R) combines the inherent material properties (conductivity / resistivity) with the size and shape of the sample. Note that the resistance of the sample is larger when the resistivity of the material is larger, as expected. Note also that the resistance increases as the length of the sample increases, and/or as the cross-sectional area decreases. This is analogous to water flowing through a pipe: a shorter and/or wider pipe will have less resistance to water flowing through it.

Ohm’s Law can be used to relate the resistance of the sample, the voltage applied across the sample, and the current flowing through the sample. Obviously, a sample with a lower resistance will conduct more current for a given applied voltage. The total current through the sample is the sum of electron current and hole current.

Note that semiconductor materials will typically deviate from ohmic (linear) behavior at higher voltage due to velocity saturation, discussed on the next slide. This causes the I-V curve to “slope over” and become sub-linear at higher voltages (dashed line on graph).

* The current I in the diagram is in the direction of conventional current, i.e. the direction positive charge would flow (from + to -). Historically, this convention was established before it was understood that current is carried by electrons, and electrons have a negative charge. Therefore, conventional current always flows in the opposite direction of electron current, but the magnitude (amps) of the current is the same. Note that because holes have positive charge, they flow in the direction of conventional current. In this course, diagrams will be labeled with the current I denoting the direction of conventional current unless otherwise specified.

Page 42: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 42

Mobility & Velocity Saturation

slope = µµµµ

Si at 300 K

source: Pierret & Neudeck (editors), Modular Series on Solid State Devices, vol. 1, Addison-Wesley Publishing, 1988.

velocity saturation

εµ=dv

Page 43: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 43

As discussed previously, the carriers (electrons and holes) in the sample are in random thermal motion at equilibrium. When an electric field (voltage) is applied, the influence of this field is superimposed on this random thermal motion, causing the carriers to “drift” in the direction dictated by the field. Thus, there is a net movement of charge through the sample, i.e. a current referred to as drift current.

This plot shows the speed or drift velocity, vd, at which an electron or hole moves through the Si sample as a function of the applied

electric field ε. Carrier velocity varies linearly with field strength for low and moderate applied fields, and the proportionality constant (slope) is the mobility, µ (often referred to as the low-field mobility in this context). As previously noted, the electron mobility is greater than the hole mobility, meaning that electrons move through the sample faster than holes in response to an applied electric field.

As the carriers travel inside the solid in response to the electric field, their forward-progress is retarded by collisions (scattering events) with vibrating Si atoms. At higher field strengths, these collisions become more frequent and more severe, thus reducing the mobility. On the graph, this is the region where the curve slopes-over and eventually saturates (at vd ≈ 1.7x107 cm/s). This is referred to as velocity saturation. In other words, increases in field strength contribute more to increased scattering than increased carrier velocity.

(In fact, if the electric field accelerates carriers to sufficiently high speeds they can cause impact ionization when colliding with Si atoms. These energetic carriers are called “hot” carriers. The impact ionization events give rise to an “avalanche” of hot carriers, which results in a large current. We will discuss this in more detail in the next module.)

Other factors, such as temperature, also affect the mobility. These effects will be discussed in more detail later in this module.

Page 44: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 44

Pure Silicon – Recombination & Generation (“R-G”)

Si

Si

Si

Si

Si Si

Si

Si

Si

Bonding Diagram

E

EC

EV

Ei EG

Energy Band Diagram

n = p = ni

generation

recombination

generation

recombination

dynamic equilibrium

Page 45: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 45

Recombination is the reverse of thermal generation: an electron meets a hole and fills the vacancy. On the band diagram, an electron in the conduction band returns to the valence band.

Recombination and generation both take place continuously inside a semiconductor material, and at any given temperature a dynamic equilibrium is established between these two competing processes. Thus, n and p represent the carrier concentrations inside the semiconductor at any given “snap shot” in time.

Recombination and generation are collectively referred to by the abbreviation “R-G” (e.g. one might refer to “minority carrier R-G” in a silicon sample).

Page 46: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 46

Matl. Band gap

Intrinsic carrier conc.

Electron effective

mass

Hole effective

mass

Electron mobility

Hole mobility

Resis-tivity

Permit-tivity

Melting Point

EG (eV)

ni (cm-3)

mn*/m0 mp*/m0 µµµµn cm2/(V.s)

µµµµp cm2/(V.s)

ρρρρ (Ω.cm)

εεεεr (=εs/ε0)

TM (oC)

Si 1.12 1.18x1010 1.18 0.81 1350 480 2.5x105 11.8 1415

Ge 0.66 2.33x1013 0.55 0.36 3900 1900 43 16 936

GaAs 1.42 2.25x106 0.066 0.52 8500 400 4x108 13.2 1238

All values in table are for T = 300 K (room temperature). m0 = 9.11x10-31 kg (mass of electron in free space) ε0 = 8.85x10-14 F/cm (permittivity of free space) εS = permittivity of the semiconductor

Some useful semiconductor properties

Properties of Common Semiconductors

Page 47: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 47

This table summarizes some physical properties of three important semiconductors: silicon (Si), germanium (Ge), and gallium-arsenide (GaAs).

Although the foregoing discussion focuses on silicon, keep in mind that the concepts in this module are directly applicable to other semiconductor materials as well.

Page 48: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 48

Aside: Band Gap Variation with Temperature

source: S.M. Sze, Physics of Semiconductor Devices, John Wiley & Sons, 1981.

Page 49: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 49

The band gap decreases with increasing temperature, but the variation over the range of normal operating temperatures is very small and can usually be neglected.

Page 50: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 50

Metal (e.g. Al)Al nucleus &core electrons

free (delocalized )electrons

ECEV

EG ~ 0.1 eV

Semiconductor (e.g. Si)

Si Si

Si Si

EC

EV

Ei EG = 1.1eV

Small or No Band Gap Moderate Band Gap

Insulator (e.g. SiO2)Si

OO

EC

EV

EG = 9 eV

Large Band Gap

Band Gap is toolarge for thermalgeneration to occur→ no carriers, notconductive ( σ ∼ 0)

(room temperature)

(room temperature)

silicondioxide(SiO2)

Aluminum (Al)

- OR -

conduction & valencebands overlap many electrons in

conduction band,very conductive

Metals, Insulators, & Semiconductors

Page 51: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 51

In a metal, the band gap is very small (sometimes referred to as a “semi-metal”) or nonexistent (i.e. the conduction and valence bands overlap). Hence, metals have a very high concentration of free (“delocalized”) electrons, and are very conductive. Metal lines are used to carry electrical signals between transistors to form a circuit, as discussed later.

Insulators (dielectrics) have a very large band gap, and hence there is a negligible concentration of electrons in the conduction band and the material is non-conductive. Such materials are useful for electrically isolating certain regions or features in a semiconductor device or circuit, as discussed later.

Semiconductors have moderate band gaps, intermediate between conductors and insulators. Silicon can behave more like a conductor or more like an insulator depending on the circumstances, hence the name semiconductor - e.g. the temperature or the doping (discussed next) can vary the conductivity over orders of magnitude.

Page 52: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 52

n=1

n=2

n=3

valence electrons (5)(outermost shell)

P15

H1

Li3

Na11

K19

Rb37

Ca20

Sr38

Sc21

Y39

Ti22

Zr40

V23

Nb41

Cr24

Mo42

Mn25

Tc43

Fe26

Ru44

Be4

Mg12

Co27

Rh45

Ni28

Pd46

Cu29

Ag47

Zn30

Cd48

Ga31

In49

Ge32

Sn50

As33

Sb51

Se34

Te52

Br35

I53

Kr36

Xe54

B5

Al13

C6

Si14

N7

P15

O8

S16

F9

Cl17

Ne10

Ar18

He2

He2

I II III IV V VI VII VIII

30.97376

nucleus (15 protons+ 15 neutrons)

core electrons (10)(inner shells)

N-Type Silicon - Example: Phosphorous

Periodic Table of Elements(abridged)

1s22s22p63s23p3

Page 53: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 53

Up to this point, we have been discussing the electronic properties of pure (intrinsic) silicon.

Silicon can be doped with other substances to make it either N-type or P-type. Note that doped silicon is also called extrinsicsilicon. We will discuss N-type silicon first.

N-type dopants reside in column 5 on the Periodic Table; common N-type dopants are phosphorous (P), arsenic (As), and antimony (Sb). We will use phosphorous for example.

Column-5 elements like phosphorous have 5 valence electrons.

Page 54: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 54

Si

Si

Si

SiSi P

Si

Si

Si

Si

Si

P

P

Si

Silicon (4 valence electrons)

Phosphorous(5 valence electrons)

N-Type Silicon - Bonding Diagram (T = 0 K)

Bonding Diagram: Silicon Doped with Phosphorous (N-Type)(Absolute Zero)

fifthvalenceelectron

Page 55: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 55

When the silicon is doped with phosphorous, the fifth valence electron of each phosphorous atom is not needed for covalent bonding. At absolute zero, this fifth valence electron is weakly held by the phosphorous atom; i.e. very little thermal energy will be required for this electron to break free and become a conduction electron.

For this reason, the phosphorous atoms are called donor atoms, because they will readily “donate” their fifth valence electrons to the material as conduction electrons.

(Recall that at absolute zero there is absolutely no thermal energy available to the sample.)

Page 56: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 56

E

EC

EV

EF

Ei

EG = 1.1 eV

ED

~ 0.1 eV

N-Type Silicon - Energy Band Diagram (T = 0 K)

“Extra” (5th) valenceelectrons of the phosphorousdopant atoms

Energy Band Diagram: N-Type Si (Absolute Zero)

n = p = 0

Page 57: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 57

On the corresponding band diagram, these fifth valence electrons occupy a new energy level, called the donor level (ED), just below the conduction band; i.e. very little energy will be required to promote these electrons to the conduction band.

The Fermi level (EF) has moved up toward the conduction band. The higher the concentration of phosphorous (ND), the more EFmoves up. Recall that the Fermi level is like a “water mark” for the electron energies in the sample.

(Aside: Previously, we discussed how energy bands and the band gap form via the splitting of energy levels when silicon atoms are brought together into covalent bonds. When phosphorous atoms are introduced into this bonding scheme, the splitting of energy levels is altered so as to form the donor level, and raise the Fermi level toward the conduction band.)

Page 58: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 58

Fermi Level vs. Dopant Concentration

source: Pierret & Neudeck (editors), Modular Series on Solid State Devices, vol. 1, Addison-Wesley Publishing, 1988.

N-type

P-type

Page 59: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 59

For N-Type silicon, the Fermi level moves toward the conduction band as the doping concentration ND is increased.

(The behavior of P-Type silicon, also shown on this diagram, will be discussed later.)

Page 60: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 60

N-Type Silicon - Very Low Temperature

Energy Band Diagram: N-Type Si (Freeze Out, 0 < T < 77 K)

EC

EV

EF

Ei

EG = 1.1 eV

ED

Energy Band Diagram: N-Type Si(Freeze Out, 0 < T < 77 K)

Si

Si P

Si Si

Si

Si

P

P 0.1 eV

Page 61: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 61

At temperatures close to but above absolute zero, these fifth valence electrons begin to break free from their weak bonds to thephosphorous atoms. On the band diagram, they move from the donor level to the conduction band. Again, this is a statistical process; as the temperature increases, more of these electrons will be promoted to the conduction band.

This temperature range (0 to about 77 kelvin for this example) is called the Freeze Out range, because the temperature is so cold as to prevent all of these electrons from reaching the conduction band.

Page 62: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 62

EC

EV

EF

Ei

EG = 1.1 eV

ED

N-Type Silicon - Low Temperature

Energy Band Diagram: N-Type Si(Low Temperature)

Si

Si P

Si Si

Si

Si

P

P

thermalgeneration

0.1 eV

Bonding Diagram: N-Type Si(Low Temperature)

thermalgeneration

n > pn ≈≈≈≈ ND

where ND is the concentration of phosphorous atoms (atoms/cm3)

Extrinsic TemperatureRegion

Page 63: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 63

Once the temperature rises out of the Freeze Out range, all of the fifth valence electrons have been released from their phosphorous host atoms and have joined the conduction band.

Some small amount of thermal generation also takes place, as previously discussed. (Recombination also takes place, though it is not explicitly shown on these diagrams. Recall that, at thermal equilibrium, the generation rate and the recombination rate areequal, giving rise to a dynamic equilibrium. Thus, n and p denote the carrier concentrations at any “snap shot” in time.)

However, the concentration of electrons in the conduction band, n, is dominated by the population of “donated” electrons; the contribution from thermal generation is negligible. Because each phosphorous atom donates one electron, we can write that n ≈ ND , where ND is the concentration of phosphorous atoms in the sample.

This is the onset of the extrinsic temperature range.

Note also that, for N-type silicon, the concentration of free electrons is greater than the concentration of holes, due to the presence of the “donated” electrons. It is no longer the case that n = p as it was in pure silicon; for N-type silicon n > p, and hence electrons are called the majority carriers, holes are the minority carriers.

This is where the name N-type comes from: the majority carriers are electrons, which have a Negative charge. (Note however that the sample is macroscopically neutral; i.e. the “extra” electron donated by each phosphorous atom is balanced by a proton in its nucleus. The sample as a whole has no net electrical charge under normal, equilibrium conditions.)

Page 64: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 64

EC

EV

EF

Ei

EG = 1.1 eV

ED

N-Type Silicon - Room Temperature

Energy Band Diagram: N-Type Si(Room Temperature ≈ 300 K)

Si

Si P

Si Si

Si

Si

P

P

thermalgeneration

0.1 eV

Bonding Diagram: N-Type Si(Room Temperature ≈ 300 K)

n > pn ≈≈≈≈ ND

Extrinsic TemperatureRegion

Page 65: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 65

As the temperature rises, more thermal generation takes place, as expected. However, note that the approximation n ≈ ND is still valid at room temperature, as the “donated” electrons in the conduction band far outnumber the thermally generated electrons. This is a useful fact, since most semiconductor devices operate around room temperature, and the majority carrier concentration is simply equal to the dopant concentration (which is generally known from the fabrication process, or can be measured).

Page 66: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 66

EC

EV

EFEi EG = 1.1 eV

ED

N-Type Silicon - High Temperature

Energy Band Diagram: N-Type Si(High Temperature, T > 450 K)

Si

Si P

Si Si

Si

Si

P

P

thermalgeneration

0.1 eV

Bonding Diagram: N-Type Si(High Temperature, T > 450 K)

n →→→→ nin = p = ni

Intrinsic TemperatureRegion

donated electrons

many more electronscreated thermally(n ≈ ni)

holes approach their intrinsicconcentration (p ≈ ni)

Page 67: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 67

As the temperature increases, the concentration of thermally generated electrons becomes significant and eventually surpasses the concentration of “donated” electrons (which is a fixed quantity, determined by the dopant concentration). In this case, napproaches ni , the intrinsic carrier concentration. Hence, this is called the intrinsic temperature region. Also note that EF → Ei, consistent with the intrinsic behavior of the material and the fact that n = p = ni.

Page 68: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 68

Fermi Level vs. Temperature

source: Pierret & Neudeck (editors), Modular Series on Solid State Devices, vol. 6, Addison-Wesley Publishing, 1988.

Page 69: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 69

This graph summarizes what we have already seen – EF → Ei as the temperature increases, consistent with the fact that n → niand p → ni (per np = ni

2).

(This graph shows both N-type and P-type; P-type silicon will be discussed shortly.)

Page 70: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 70

Summary: Carrier Concentration vs. Temperature

source: Pierret & Neudeck (editors), Modular Series on Solid State Devices, vol. 1, Addison-Wesley Publishing, 1988.

Page 71: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 71

This graph summarizes the electron concentration as a function of temperature for N-type silicon.

Page 72: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 72

Revisiting the Relationship Between f(E), g(E), n & p

N-Type

P-Type

Intrinsic(pure)

source: Pierret & Neudeck (editors), Modular Series on Solid State Devices, vol. 1, Addison-Wesley Publishing, 1988.

Page 73: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 73

This graph shows the relationship between the Fermi function, the density of states function, and the carrier concentrations for pure and doped silicon. We have already seen this for pure silicon, and will discuss P-type silicon later. For now, we will compare and contrast N-type silicon and pure silicon.

Looking at the graphs corresponding to N-type silicon, we see that the Fermi level is near the conduction band, as previously discussed. This is consistent with the fact that there is a greater concentration of electrons in the conduction band for N-type material. Recall that the Fermi level is like a “water mark” for the electron energies, and is the pivot point of the tail of the distribution (the length of the tail being determined by the temperature).

Also recall that as the dopant concentration (ND) increases, the Fermi level moves up toward the conduction band. Visualize this in the diagram above; this will increase the concentration of conduction electrons.

Other than the position of the Fermi energy level, the Fermi function itself does not change. Nor does the density of states function, as it is not dependent on doping.

Note that the electron concentration is much greater than the hole concentration (n > p), as expected.

Page 74: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 74

−=

−=

TkEEnn

TkEENn

B

iFi

B

CFC

exp

exp

+=i

BiFnnTkEE ln

Freeze-Out Temperature Region

n ≈ ND

These equations hold for nondegenerately doped Si (EC - EF < 3kBT) in the extrinsic and intrinsic temperature regions

N-Type Silicon - Useful Equations

Extrinsic & Intrinsic Temperature Regions

intrinsic temperature region:

−+== +

TkEE

NNn

B

DFD

DD

g exp1

n = p = ni

ND+ = conc. of ionized donor atoms (cm-3)

gD = spin degeneracy of donor level [= 2 (standard value)]

extrinsic temperature region:

n p = ni2

Page 75: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 75

These equations can be used to calculate the carrier concentrations in an N-type sample if the Fermi level is known, or, conversely, to calculate the Fermi level if the carrier concentrations are known.

The equations for the extrinsic and intrinsic temperature regions are valid for non-degenerately doped semiconductor materials only. For N-type material, this means that the Fermi level is below the conduction band edge (EC) and is not too close to it (specifically, EF is at least 3kBT below EC). If the Fermi level is close to the conduction band, or inside the conduction band, the sample is said to be degenerately doped, and these equations are not valid.*

Note that, if one carrier concentration (n or p) is known, the other can be calculated using np = ni2 . This relationship holds for pure

and doped semiconductor materials alike! For pure silicon (only!) it is the case that n = p = ni (hence np = ni2). This is obviously

not the case for N-type material; we know that n > p. However, the product np is still equal to ni2 . This fact represents a balance

between thermal generation and recombination inside the material; when the electron concentration n is raised, the likelihood of a hole meeting an electron (recombination) increases, and hence the hole concentration p decreases proportionately. Since p is reduced by the same factor that n is raised, the relationship np = ni

2 is preserved. (This applies to any nondegenerately-doped semiconductor sample at equilibrium - i.e. no optical generation, etc.)

* Note that heavily (degenerately) doped silicon is very conductive, similar to a metal. Also note that such high doping levels perturb the silicon crystal structure (due the presence of so many dopant atoms), and alter the band gap (usually making it narrower) and the internal conduction properties (e.g. the mobility, discussed later).

Page 76: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 76

N-Type Silicon - Conduction

conductivity (σσσσ)

σ σ σ σ = qµµµµnn + qµµµµpp ≈≈≈≈ qµµµµnND

q = elementary charge = 1.602x10-19 coul.µn = electron mobility [= 1350 cm2/(V.s) for Si, room temp.]µp = hole mobility [= 480 cm2/(V.s) for Si, room temp.]

(Ω.cm)−1(Ω.cm)

resistivity (ρρρρ)

(Ω)

L = length of sample (cm)A = cross-sectional area of sample (cm2)

resistance (R)

R LA

= ρ

Ohm’s Law

V = I RV = applied voltage (volts)I = current (amps)

RSi

V

+-

I

electronsholesA

σρ 1 =

Page 77: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 77

The conductivity and resistivity of an N-type sample can be calculated from the doping concentration. Note that the conductivity increases as the doping concentration increases, as expected.

Similar to our discussion of pure silicon, the resistance of the sample can be calculated from the resistivity and the physical dimensions. Ohm’s law can then be used to relate the current through the sample to the applied voltage. (At higher voltages, the sample will deviate from ohmic behavior due to velocity saturation, as previously discussed.)

Note that the current is dominated by electrons, the majority carriers.

Page 78: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 78

Resistivity vs. Dopant Concentration

source: Pierret & Neudeck (editors), Modular Series on Solid State Devices, vol. 1, Addison-Wesley Publishing, 1988.

Page 79: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 79

The resistivity of N-type silicon decreases as the doping concentration increases, as expected. The same is true for P-type silicon, discussed later.

(On this graph, the reason for the difference between the two is the higher mobility of electrons vs. holes, thus making the N-type sample more conductive than a P-type sample with the same dopant concentration.)

Page 80: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 80

Aside: Mobility is not a constant

P+P+

low temperature(low kinetic energy)

high temperature(high kinetic energy)

source: S.M. Sze, Physics of Semiconductor Devices, John Wiley & Sons, 1981.

Page 81: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 81

There are two scattering mechanisms which impede the motion of a carrier through the material, reducing the mobility. Lattice scattering (aka. phonon scattering) refers to the interaction of the carrier with vibrating Si atoms in the material. The amount of lattice scattering increases with increasing temperature (because the atomic vibration increases). Ionized impurity scattering refers to the interaction of the carrier with an ionized dopant (or other impurity) atom. The amount of impurity scattering increases with increasing dopant concentration.

Mobility varies with doping concentration. For lighter doping, µ is relatively constant wrt. doping concentration - ionized impurity scattering is negligible, lattice scattering is dominant. For higher doping, ionized impurity scattering can no longer be neglected, and µ declines with increasing doping concentration.

Mobility varies with temperature. For a lightly-doped semiconductor, ionized impurity scattering can be neglected. Lattice scattering dominates, and µ decreases with increasing temperature. For a heavily-doped semiconductor, ionized impurity scattering can not be neglected. However, the ionized impurity scattering component actually decreases as temperature increases, because the carriers have a higher kinetic energy and are less susceptible to the coulombic attraction of an ionized impurity. This is the reason for the small positive-slope region in the µ vs. T graph (which appears only for the heavier-doped cases, shown toward the bottom of the graph). This positive-slope region is small, however, because the lattice scattering component dominates as the temperature rises, resulting once again in a negative slope.

Page 82: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 82

n=1

n=2valence electrons (3)

B5

H1

Li3

Na11

K19

Rb37

Ca20

Sr38

Sc21

Y39

Ti22

Zr40

V23

Nb41

Cr24

Mo42

Mn25

Tc43

Fe26

Ru44

Be4

Mg12

Co27

Rh45

Ni28

Pd46

Cu29

Ag47

Zn30

Cd48

Ga31

In49

Ge32

Sn50

As33

Sb51

Se34

Te52

Br35

I53

Kr36

Xe54

B5

Al13

C6

Si14

N7

P15

O8

S16

F9

Cl17

Ne10

Ar18

He2

He2

I II III IV V VI VII VIII

10.811

nucleus (5 protons+ 5 neutrons) core electrons (2)

(inner shells)

P-Type Silicon - Example: Boron

Periodic Table of Elements(abridged)

1s22s22p1

Page 83: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 83

We will now discuss P-type silicon. The discussion will be analogous to N-type silicon.

P-type dopants are found in column 3 of the Periodic Table, hence having 3 valence electrons. Common P-type dopants are boron (B) and indium (In); we will use boron for example.

Page 84: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 84

Si

Si

Si

SiSi B

Si

Si

Si

Si

Si

B

B

Si

Silicon (4 valence electrons)

Boron(3 valence electrons)

P-Type Silicon - Bonding Diagram (T = 0 K)

Bonding Diagram: Silicon Doped with Boron (P-Type)(Absolute Zero)

hole

Page 85: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 85

Boron has only three valence electrons. When incorporated into silicon, one covalent bond will be vacant as shown. Thus, boroncontributes holes to the material. Because a hole is a vacancy that will “accept” and electron, the boron dopant atoms are called acceptor atoms.

Page 86: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 86

E

EC

EV

EF

Ei

EG = 1.1 eV

EA

P-Type Silicon - Energy Band Diagram (T = 0 K)

Holes providedby Boron atoms

Energy Band Diagram: P-Type Si (Absolute Zero)

n = p = 0

~ 0.1 eV

Page 87: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 87

On the band diagram, the holes from the boron atoms reside at the acceptor energy level, EA, just above the valence band.

Note that the Fermi level has moved down toward the valence band. The higher the dopant concentration, the closer it is to the valence band (see previous slide showing Fermi level vs. dopant concentration for N-Type and P-Type silicon).

Note also that, at absolute zero, there are no charge carriers available for conduction. There are no electrons in the conduction band, and no holes in the valence band. (If a voltage is applied across this material, there is no where for the electrons to move in the valence band - recall that they require holes to facilitate their movement.)

Page 88: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 88

P-Type Silicon - Very Low Temperature

EC

EV

EF

Ei

EG = 1.1 eV

EA

Energy Band Diagram: P-Type Si(Freeze Out)

Page 89: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 89

As the temperature rises above absolute zero, some electrons in the conduction band gain enough thermal energy to rise to the acceptor level, EA. Note that this is equivalent to a hole moving from EA to the valence band. Again, this is a statistical process.

This is the Freeze Out temperature region.

Page 90: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 90

Energy Band Diagram: P-Type Si (Low Temperature)

Si

Si B

Si Si

Si

Si

B

B

Energy Band Diagram: P-Type Si(Low Temperature)

thermalgeneration

Holes providedby Boron atoms

EC

EV

EF

Ei

EA

thermalgeneration

P-Type Silicon - Low Temperature

p > np ≈≈≈≈ NA

where NA is the concentration of boron atoms (atoms/cm3)

Extrinsic TemperatureRegion

Page 91: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 91

At some temperature, all of the holes will have moved from EA to the valence band. This makes the sample more conductive.

Recall that we will treat holes as independent, positive charge carriers.

Thermal generation will also begin to take place. However, the number of holes created by thermal generation is negligible compared to the number provided by the boron atoms, so p ≈ NA .

This is the extrinsic temperature region.

Holes are now the majority carriers, p > n. Electrons are the minority carriers. The material is called P-type because the majority carriers are Positive. (Again, note that the sample is macroscopically neutral.)

Page 92: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 92

Energy Band Diagram: P-Type Si (Room Temperature)

Si

Si B

Si Si

Si

Si

B

B

Energy Band Diagram: P-Type Si(Room Temperature)

p > np ≈≈≈≈ NA

P-Type Silicon - Room Temperature

EC

EV

EF

Ei

EA

Extrinsic TemperatureRegion

Page 93: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 93

At room temperature, more thermal generation takes place.

Page 94: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 94

Energy Band Diagram: P-Type Si (High Temperature)

Si

Si B

Si Si

Si

Si

B

B

Energy Band Diagram: P-Type Si(High Temperature)

EC

EV

EF

Ei

EA

P-Type Silicon - High Temperature

many more holes created thermally (p ≈ ni)

electrons approach their intrinsicconcentration (n ≈ ni)

p →→→→ nin = p = ni

Intrinsic TemperatureRegion

Page 95: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 95

At very high temperatures, enough holes will be created by thermal generation to overshadow the (fixed) concentration of holes from the boron atoms. Thus, n and p approach their intrinsic value, ni . EF approaches its intrinsic value, Ei. This is the intrinsic temperature region.

Page 96: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 96

Freeze-Out Temperature Region

These equations hold for nondegenerately doped Si (EF - EV < 3kBT) in the extrinsic and intrinsic temperature regions

P-Type Silicon - Useful Equations

Extrinsic & Intrinsic Temperature Regions

intrinsic temperature region:

−+== −

TkEE

NNp

B

FAA

AA

g exp1

n = p = ni

NA- = conc. of ionized acceptor atoms (cm-3)

gA = spin degeneracy of acceptor level [= 4 (standard value)]

extrinsic temperature region:

n p = ni2

−=

−=

TkEEnp

TkEENp

B

Fii

B

FVV

exp

exp

−=i

BiFnpTkEE ln

p ≈ NA

Page 97: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 97

Equations for calculating carrier concentrations and Fermi level. Similar to those discussed previously for N-type silicon.

Page 98: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 98

P-Type Silicon - Conduction

conductivity (σσσσ)

σ σ σ σ = qµµµµnn + qµµµµpp ≈≈≈≈ qµµµµpNA

q = elementary charge = 1.602x10-19 coul.µn = electron mobility [= 1350 cm2/(V.s) for Si, room temp.]µp = hole mobility [= 480 cm2/(V.s) for Si, room temp.]

(Ω.cm)−1(Ω.cm)

resistivity (ρρρρ)

(Ω)

L = length of sample (cm)A = cross-sectional area of sample (cm2)

resistance (R)

R LA

= ρ

Ohm’s Law

V = I RV = applied voltage (volts)I = current (amps)

RSi

V

+-

I

electrons

holesA

σρ 1 =

current is dominated by holes(majority carriers)

Page 99: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 99

Note that the current is dominated by hole flow (the majority carriers).

This concludes our discussion of P-type silicon. Note that many of the earlier slides presented during the discussion of N-type silicon also contained related information about P-type silicon (in particular, some of the graphs). It is advised that you take a moment to review these slides and take note of this.

Page 100: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 100

Donor & Acceptor Energy Levels

source: S.M. Sze, Physics of Semiconductor Devices, John Wiley & Sons, 1981.

Page 101: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 101

This chart shows donor and acceptor energy levels of various dopants (impurities) in Si, Ge, and GaAs.

The levels below midgap are acceptor levels unless otherwise indicated by a “D” and are measured wrt. the top of the valence band. The levels above midgap are donor levels unless otherwise indicated by an “A” and are measured wrt. the bottom of the conduction band.

These values were determined from measured ionization energies for these various impurities in Si, Ge, and GaAs.

Page 102: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 102

Mid-Gap States (Traps)

EC

EV

Ei EG = 1.1eV

indirect thermal generation

trap site

1

2ET

EC

EV

Ei EG = 1.1eV

indirect recombination

trap site

1

2

ET

T contaminantatom (trap)

1

2

Page 103: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 103

There are no states inside the band gap for truly pure silicon.

However, as shown on the previous slide, various contaminants can introduce allowed energy states inside the band gap. These impurity states (aka. traps) act as “stepping stones” for carriers to traverse the band gap, thus facilitating generation and recombination. For example, an electron in the valence band can gain enough energy to jump into a trap state inside the band gap, and then subsequently gain energy to jump to the conduction band (called indirect thermal generation). Similarly, an electron and hole might meet at an impurity (trap) site in the silicon and recombine there (called indirect recombination) as shown above. (The electron might be trapped first by the impurity atom and then the hole arrives later, or visa-versa.)

The most influential traps are those near mid-gap. They are the most effective recombination-generation (R-G) centers, because they place a “stepping stone” about half way between the valence and conduction bands. Noteworthy contaminants are sodium (Na), potassium (K), and iron (Fe), which are common impurities encountered during manufacturing. The cleanroommanufacturing environment goes to great lengths to minimize contaminants.

Key distinctions between contamination (traps) and doping (donor/acceptor levels): (1) doping is intentional and controlled; (2) doping produces donor and acceptor energy levels very close to the band edges, whereas contaminants tend to produce deeper energy states near mid-gap; (3) trap sites are distinct points (or perhaps small clusters) encountered at specific locations in the silicon sample, whereas dopant is spread throughout the sample in a more uniform fashion; (4) donors and acceptors contribute charge carriers to the sample, whereas traps introduce R-G centers.

Page 104: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 104

Aside: Silicon Crystal Structure

diamond unit cell (e.g. Si, Ge) zincblende unit cell (e.g. GaAs)

source: Pierret & Neudeck (editors), Modular Series on Solid State Devices, vol. 6, Addison-Wesley Publishing, 1988.

Page 105: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 105

We have been using 2-D schematic depictions of the silicon bonding structure, to illustrate the basic concepts of covalent bonding, thermal generation and recombination, conduction, etc.

However, if we look inside a silicon solid at the atomic level, we see that the silicon atoms are arranged in the 3-D crystal structure shown here, called the diamond structure (the same crystal structure that carbon assumes when it forms diamond). This collection of atoms, known as the “unit cell”, is repeated to form the whole solid. Germanium also has the diamond structure. Gallium arsenide (GaAs) has a very similar structure called zincblende. The parameter ais called the lattice constant; it is 5.4 angstroms for Si and 5.6 angstroms for Ge and GaAs.

The crystal structure determines the spatial arrangement of Si atoms, and hence the potential field that an electron sees as it moves inside the crystal. Modern physics treats the electron as a matter wave* moving through the crystal and reflecting from the crystal planes formed by the Si atoms. deBroglie described matter waves by the expression p = h/λ, where p is the momentum of the electron (a particle property), λ is its wavelength (a wave property), and h is Planck’s constant. Since the kinetic energy of the electron is E = ½mv2 (m is the mass of the particle and v is its velocity) and the momentum is p = mv, it follows that p=√(2E). Thus, deBroglie’s expression relates the kinetic energy of the electron to its wavelength.

The crystal structure determines the energies/wavelengths that are allowed to exist inside the solid. The band gap represents those electron energies (wavelengths) which are forbidden – these waves undergo destructive interference when they reflect from the crystal planes. This explanation of the origin of the band gap is complimentary to the one provided earlier (based on energy level splitting in accordance with the Pauli exclusion principle).

* Aside: Matter waves were first described by the physicist deBroglie, who proposed that particles exhibit wave-like behavior. This is complimentary to Planck’s earlier demonstration that waves exhibit particle-like behavior. For example, light is often thought of as a wave, exhibiting wave behaviors such as interference and diffraction. However, it is sometimes necessary to treat light as a particle (photon), e.g. blackbody radiation, the photoelectric effect, etc. Similarly, we tend to think of electrons as particles, but they have also been shown to exhibit wave behavior such as diffraction. Whether it is appropriate to treat electrons (or light) as a particle or wave depends entirely on the situation being considered. The two models – particle and wave – are considered complimentary (as opposed to contradictory), and can be used together to obtain a complete description or model.

Page 106: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 106

ExerciseSuppose the sample shown here is doped with an Arsenic (As) concentration of 5x1016 cm-3. (1) Is this sample N-type or P-type, and how do you know this? (2) If 0.5 V is applied across the sample, how much current flows (assume it is ohmic)? (3) Is this current dominated by electrons or holes, and how do you know this?

Suppose the sample is doped with Indium (In) instead (same concentration). Repeat parts 1 – 3 above.

1.0 cm

0.15 cm Si

0.30 cm

Page 107: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 107

Explain why the N-type sample conducts more current than the P-type sample.

Page 108: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 108

Solution

( )

mAAV

cmcm

cmcm

cm

sVcmcoul

RVI

ALR

cmEENq cmDn

243243.005.25.0

05.2)30.0)(15.0(

)0.1)(092.0(

092.08.10

11

8.101651350)19602.1( 1132

.

====

===

===

=

−==

Ω

Ω⋅Ω

⋅Ω

−−−Ω

ρσ

ρ

µσ

( )

mAAVRVI

cmcmcmcm

ALR

cm

cmEcmENq cmsVcoulAp

86086.078.55.0

78.5)30.0)(15.0()0.1)(26.0(

26.084.311

84.3165480)19602.1( 1132

.

==Ω

==

Ω=⋅Ω==

⋅Ω===

=

−== −−−

Ω⋅

ρσ

ρ

µσ

Arsenic is an N-type dopant, because it is in column 5 on the Periodic Table and hence has five valence electrons. Majority carriers are electrons, hence current is dominated by electrons.

conductivity

resistivity

resistance

Ohm’s law

Indium is a P-type dopant, because it is in column 3 on the Periodic Table and hence has three valence electrons. Majority carriers are holes, hence current is dominated by holes.

conductivity

resistivity

resistance

Ohm’s law

Page 109: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Electronic Properties of Silicon / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 1 - 109

The N-type sample has a lower resistance and hence conducts more current because electrons have a higher mobility than holes (µn >µp).

Page 110: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 1

2

The

PN Junction

Page 111: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 2

This is the second module in a five-module introduction to semiconductor device physics. The modules are:

1. Electronic Properties of Silicon

2. The PN Junction

3. The MOS Capacitor

4. The MOSFET

5. Small Circuits

Understanding the physics of the PN junction is an important step toward understanding the MOSFET transistor, because the source and drain regions of the MOSFET are PN junctions. The PN junction is also an important microelectronic device in its own right; we will see that it functions as a diode.

Objectives of this module:

• Understand what the depletion region is and how it forms

• Understand what the built-in voltage is and how it forms

• Understand the band diagram for a PN junction at equilibrium

• Understand the behavior of the PN junction under forward bias

• Understand the behavior of the PN junction under reverse bias

• Understand the ideal diode behavior, and compare it to a real diode

• Understand reverse junction breakdown

Looking Back: We are prepared to understand the physics of the PN junction because we understand, from the previous module, the behavior of N-type and P-type silicon.

Looking Ahead: We will study the MOS capacitor in the next module, then combine this with our knowledge of the PN junction to understand how a transistor works.

Page 112: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 3

B-

B-

B-

B-

B-

B-

B-

B-

P+

P+

P+

P+

P+

P+

P+

P+

DepletionRegion

PNJunction

N-Type Si P-Type Si

εbi,Vbi

PN Junction - Schematic Diagram

εεεεbi, Vbi

W

Built-in electric field, voltage

Width of Depletion Region

P+

B-

Uncovered phosphorous ion

Uncovered boron ion

W

N P

N P

Page 113: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 4

When N-type and P-type materials are put in contact, a PN junction is formed.

Diffusion drives majority carriers across the junction, in response to the concentration difference (gradient), exposing or “uncovering” dopant ions in the vicinity of the junction, as shown. However, an electric field builds up (due to the uncovered ions) in a direction opposing diffusion, and at some point these competing effects balance one another and an equilibrium is reached.

There is a depletion region near the junction, and a built-in electric field (voltage) in this region.

We will discuss all of this in more detail.

Page 114: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 5

EC

EV

EF

EC

EV

EF

qVbi

E

E

EC

EV

EF

W

N P

PNJunction

IsolatedN-Type &P-TypeMaterials

PN Junction - Energy Band Diagram

Fermi levelsaligned at equilibrium

Page 115: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 6

We can construct an energy band diagram for the PN junction. We start with the energy band diagrams for N-type and P-type material, discussed previously.

The key to combining them is to understand that the Fermi levels must align at equilibrium. As long as the Fermi levels are notaligned, carriers will flow across the junction, because it is energetically favorable for them to do so.

Visualize putting the top two diagrams together, then sliding them vertically until the Fermi levels line up.

Page 116: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 7

Diffusion Illustration

water and ink not in contact diffusion begins

Blue InkWaterWater

Ink

uniform concentration

Isolation Contact Equilibrium

glass fishtank

water-tightpartition

Fish Tank Example

removepartition

Page 117: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 8

This is an example to illustrate the concept of diffusion. Diffusion is a natural process that takes place when a concentration difference (gradient) exists in a system. Diffusion refers to transport from areas of higher concentration to areas of lower concentration, until a uniform concentration is achieved throughout (at which point there is no longer a concentration gradient,and diffusion ceases).

Page 118: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 9

N PIsolation Contact - Diffusion Begins

PN Junction - Diffusion & Drift

PN he-

PNP+

P+

P+

*

+ -εbi

B-

B-

B-

electron diffusionhole diffusion

hole driftelectron drift

PNP+

P+

P+

B-

B-

B-

W

+ -

Drift & Diffusion CompeteEquilibrium: Drift = Diffusion

Page 119: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 10

Diffusion:

N-type material has a high concentration of free electrons. P-type material has a high concentration of holes. Similar to the fish tank example, when the two materials are placed in contact, diffusion begins. Electrons diffuse from the N-type side (higher concentration) into the P-type side (lower concentration). Holes diffuse from the P-type side (higher concentration) into the N-type side (lower concentration). If there were no charge involved, this process would continue until a uniform concentration of electrons and holes was achieved throughout the entire sample (at which point a concentration gradient would cease to exist, and diffusion would stop).

Drift:

However, diffusion is not the only force at work in this system. Notice that, as diffusion takes place, dopant ions are exposed or “uncovered” near the junction. In other words, when an electron diffuses out of the N-type side, it leaves behind a positively-charged phosphorous dopant ion; when a hole diffuses out of the P-type side, it leaves behind a negatively-charged boron ion. Note that these ions are bonded into the silicon lattice and are not mobile; only the free electrons and holes can move. Also, note that the electrons and holes recombine as they traverse the junction, as would be expected.

This region of uncovered, fixed charge near the junction is called the depletion region because it is depleted of mobile charge carriers (i.e. free electrons and holes). This uncovered charge gives rise to an electric field in the depletion region, and as diffusion continues more charge is uncovered (the depletion region grows wider) and the electric field increases. This is called the built-in electric field, giving rise to a built-in voltage. Electrons and holes are charged particles, and hence their motion will be influenced by this electric field; as discussed in module 1, motion of a charged particle due to an electric field is called drift.

Equilibrium:

Note that the electric field is oriented so as to oppose diffusion, i.e. diffusion is driving electrons from N-side to P-side, whereas the electric field drives electrons from P-side to N-side. Obviously there will come a point at which these two forces, drift and diffusion, are equal but opposite, and equilibrium will be established. The depletion region and built-in voltage remain. At this point, the Fermi levels will be aligned on the band diagram (see next slide).

Page 120: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 11

PN Junction - Diffusion & Drift (cont.)

EC

EV

EFEC

EV

EF

EC

EV

EF

EC

EV

EF

EC

EV

EF

EC

EV

EF

W

W

Contact

Drift & DiffusionCompete

Equilibrium

Electron Diffusion Recombination

Hole Diffusion

qVbi

Fermi levels aligned

time

Page 121: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 12

This tells the same story, but from an energy band perspective.

Before we begin, it is important to reiterate that electron energy increases going upward on a band diagram, and hole energy increases going downward. As discussed in the previous module, electrons like to sink (roll downhill) and holes like to float (roll uphill).

Immediately after contact, electrons diffuse from N-side to P-side. Holes diffuse from P-side to N-side. They recombine in the depletion region, as shown.

The band diagrams slide vertically wrt. each other as drift and diffusion compete. The potential of the P-side is being raised wrt. the N-side, as the uncovered charge gives rise to a built-in voltage. The potential “hill” or “barrier” (built-in voltage) across the depletion region gets bigger as the bands slide, making it more difficult for carriers to diffuse across the junction. When the Fermi levels have aligned, it is no longer energetically favorable for carriers to move from one side to the other. The barrier is sufficiently high so as to impede further diffusion.* Drift and diffusion have balanced each other, and there is no net movement of carriers across the junction – equilibrium has been established.

Finally, it is important to note that equilibrium is established very rapidly after contact – it is instantaneous for all practical purposes.

* Aside -- Technical Note: It is a dynamic equilibrium (as opposed to a static equilibrium) because there are carriers crossing the junction, but there is no net movement of carriers. This tiny population of carriers arises from thermal generation of minority carriers inside the depletion region or in the quasi-neutral regions (described later), where they can drift across the junction due to Vbi. It also arises from the fact that, statistically, some majority carriers in the far “tail” of the Fermi distribution will have enough energy to overcome the barrier and diffuse across the junction. The key point is that, at equilibrium, drift counterbalances diffusion. At any “snap shot” in time, the net flow of electrons across the junction is zero, and the net flow of holes across the junction is zero.

Page 122: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 13

The Depletion Region: A Closer Look

PNP+

P+

P+

+ -εbi

B-

B-

B-

W

fixed ions, depleted of electrons

fixed ions, depleted of holes

Si

Si P

Si Si

Si

Si

P

P

thermalgeneration

Si

Si P+

Si Si

Si

Si

P+

P+

thermalgeneration

Si

Si B-

Si Si

Si

Si

B-

B-

thermalgeneration

Si

Si B

Si Si

Si

Si

B

B

thermalgeneration

Page 123: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 14

A closer look inside the PN junction.

The N-type and P-type bulk regions or neutral regions, away from the junction, have the bonding diagrams discussed earlier for doped silicon. Nothing new here.

However, in the depletion region on the N-side, note that there are uncovered, positively-charged phosphorous ions. The free electrons (i.e. the fifth valence electrons discussed earlier) diffused out of this region and into the P-side.

Similarly, in the depletion region on the P-side, note that there are negatively-charged boron ions. One way to understand this, treating holes as independent positively-charged particles, is to say that the holes diffused to the N-side leaving behind boron dopant ions with a net negative charge. An equivalent way of understanding this is to observe that the electrons that diffused into the P-side from the N-side now fill the holes in the boron-doped bonding diagram, as shown; i.e. recombination has taken place, as stated earlier. The presence of this electron gives the boron atom a net negative charge.

Page 124: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 15

EC

EV

EF

qVbi

W

εbi , Vbi

Summary - PN Junction at Equilibrium

SchematicDiagram

EnergyBandDiagram

B-

B-

B-

B-

B-

B-

B-

B-

P+

P+

P+

P+

P+

P+

P+

P+

N P

E

Page 125: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 16

The built-in voltage (Vbi) is a “hill” or “energy barrier” on the band diagram, and exists only across the depletion region (as indicated by the sloped bands), because all of the charge is contained there. (Note that this is an idealization.)

The magnitude of the built-in voltage (i.e. the height of the hill) is equal to the difference between the two Fermi levels before contact. It follows that increasing the dopant concentration in one or both sides of the junction will result in a larger built-in voltage.

* Note: To be specific, equilibrium means: (1) no applied voltage; (2) no electric or magnetic fields present; (3) thermal equilibrium (no thermal gradients in the device); (4) no mechanical stress; (5) no external sources of excitation (e.g. no light or radiation).

Page 126: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 17

Equilibrium - Energy, Voltage, Field, & Charge

E

x

EC or EV(from band diagram)

V

x qEV −=

εx

ρρρρ

+

-

dxdV−=ε

dxVd2

2

~ −ρx

qND

-qNA

0

0

Vbi

-xn xp

N P0

W

Electron Energy

Voltage

Electric Field

Charge Density

nDpA xx NN =

metallurgical junction

abrupt junction

Page 127: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 18

This graph shows the electron energy, voltage, electric field, and charge density (charge per unit volume) as a function of position (x) across the PN junction at equilibrium (x = 0 is the junction line, sometimes referred to as the metallurgical junction). This is an abrupt junction or step junctionbecause the doping concentration changes from ND to NA abruptly (step function at the metallurgical junction), and hence the charge density changes abruptly from +qND to -qNA. (In contrast to a graded junction, where the doping concentration, and hence the charge density, changes gradually – such as the linearly graded junction discussed later in this module.)

xn and xp denote the width of the depletion region in the N-type and P-type sides, respectively, and thus the depletion region extends from –xn to +xp (i.e. W = xn + xp). Note that all of the “action” takes place inside the depletion region; the bulk regions away from the junction are neutral (i.e. flat bands, no net charge, no electric field, no voltage drop).

The energy curve is taken from the band diagram (Ec or Ev) . The band diagrams we have been using thus far are somewhat idealized, in that the outer edges of the depletion region are assumed to be sharply defined and the charge becomes zero right at the edges (step functions). A more realistic band diagram is shown here, where the edges are not sharply defined, and the charge decays to zero at the edges.

The shape of the voltage curve can be obtained by flipping the energy curve (Ec or Ev) upside down, because E = -qV, or V = -E/q. This reinforces the fact that a voltage drop exists where the energy bands are sloped (the steeper the slope, the greater the voltage drop). Stated another way, if the electron energy is higher at one location than another, there must be a voltage drop between those two points (by definition).

The electric field plot can be obtained from the slope of the voltage plot, since ε = -dV/dx. The peak electric field occurs right at the junction.

The charge density can be obtained from the slope of the electric field, since ρ ∼ -d2V/dx2.* Again, we often idealize the depletion charge as two “blocks” of uniform charge as shown by the dashed line in the diagram. This gives the triangular electric field plot shown by the dashed line. Charge neutrality requires that NAxp = NDxn, a convenient expression relating the depletion depth on either side to the doping concentrations (intuitively, if the doping concentration on one side is lower than the other, the depletion region in that side must be larger to uncover enough charge to achieve balance).

* Do not confuse the charge density here with the resistivity discussed in the previous module; they both happen to be represented by the Greek letter rho (ρ), but they are different quantities.

Page 128: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 19

PN Junction at Equilibrium - Useful Equations

in the extrinsic temperature region, nn ≈ ND and pp ≈ NA

Built-in VoltageEFN = Fermi energy level, n-type side (eV) nn = electron concentration, n-type side (cm-3)EFP = Fermi energy level, p-type side (eV) pp = hole concentration, p-type side (cm-3)q = elementary charge (1.602x10-19 coul.) ni = intrinsic carrier concentration (cm-3)kB = Boltzmann constant (8.62x10-5 eV/K) ND = dopant concentration, n-type (cm-3) T= temperature (K) NA = dopant concentration, p-type (cm-3)kBT = thermal energy = 0.260 eV at 300 K kBT/q = thermal voltage = 0.260 V at 300K

Depletion Region Width (equilibrium)

εs = permittivity of semiconductor (1.036x10-12 F/cm for Si)

Junction Capacitance (equilibrium)

=−=

i

pnBFPFNbi

n

pnqTk

qEEV 2ln

DA

DAbispn

NqNNNVxxW )(2 +=+= ε

A = area of junction

DA

DAbis

ssj

NqNNNV

AW

AC)(2

0+

==ε

εε

)(2

DAD

Abisn

NNNN

qVx

+⋅= ε

)(2

DAA

Dbisp

NNNN

qVx

+⋅= ε

The following equations are valid for an abrupt (step) junction with uniform doping on both sides.

Page 129: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 20

If the doping concentration on each side of the junction is known, the built-in voltage, depletion region width, and capacitance of the junction can be calculated for the equilibrium condition (i.e. no applied voltage). These equations are valid for an abrupt (step) junction with uniform doping on both sides.

Built-in voltage: Note that the built-in voltage is simply the difference between the two Fermi levels before contact (dividing by q converts energy to voltage). This makes sense based on our earlier discussion of how the built-in voltage arises - the band diagrams slide vertically until the Fermi levels line up, thus the height of the potential hill is just the difference between the Fermi levels prior to contact. Increasing the doping concentration on one or both sides of the junction will pull the pre-contact Fermi levels farther apart, thus increasing Vbi. (Vbi is typically 0.5 – 0.8 volts.) Temperature dependence: This equation can be misleading wrt. temperature. The kBT/q term in front suggests that Vbi increases as T increases. However, recall that nn and ppwill approach ni as the temperature increases, thus reducing Vbi. In the intrinsic temperature regime, nn → ni and pp → ni, thus the natural log term goes to zero and Vbi → 0; i.e. both sides of the junction look like intrinsic silicon (as if there were no junction at all) – both Fermi levels are at mid-gap (EFN = EFP = Ei) and there is no barrier.

Depletion region width: The depletion region can also be calculated from the doping concentrations. Temperature dependence: Per the discussion above, as the temperature increases the Fermi levels move toward mid-gap and W is decreased. In the intrinsic temperature region, EFN = EFP = Ei, indicating that both sides of the junction look like intrinsic silicon (as if there were no junction at all), and W = 0. It can be shown that W goes approximately as T-3/2.

Junction Capacitance: The charge separation in the depletion region gives rise to a capacitance. The simplest model is to treat it like a common parallel plate capacitor, with charge fluctuating in two thin sheets at the outer edges of the depletion region, thus Cj = εsA/W (more on this later). More sophisticated models would take into account the shape of the charge distribution as well as fringing capacitance.

Later, we will see how applying a voltage to the PN junction modulates W and Cj. The expressions presented here are valid only at equilibrium.

Page 130: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 21

N P

VA

+-

Forward BiasedPN Junction

Forward Biased: P-side at positive potential wrt. N-side Depletion Region Narrows Energy Barrier Height Decreases by amount qVA Some carriers overcome barrier - traverse depletion region Diode is “ON” - diffusion current I (~mA)

I

EC

EV

EFPE

EnergyBandDiagram

qVA

EFN

q(Vbi-VA)qVA

Equilibrium (VA=0)Forward Biased

Forward BiasedPN Junction

W(eq.)W

qVA

PN Junction - Forward Bias

Page 131: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 22

We will now discuss what happens when a voltage is applied across the PN junction. Since a voltage source has two terminals, positive and negative, it follows that there are two ways to bias the junction. They are called forward bias and reverse bias. We will examine forward bias first.

When the N-side is held at a negative potential relative to the P-side, the PN junction is forward biased. The applied voltage (VA) acts to reduce the height of the barrier or potential “hill”, as shown. Thus, some electrons can now overcome the barrier and diffuse from the N-side to the P-side. Similarly, holes can diffuse from the P-side to the N-side. Hence, a diffusion current is observed and the device is considered “on”.

We will take a more detailed look at forward bias shortly.

Page 132: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 23

EC

EV

EFP

E

EnergyBandDiagramqVAEFN

qVA

q(Vbi+VA)

qVA

Equilibrium (VA=0)Reverse Biased

N P

VA

+ -

PN Junction - Reverse Bias

Reverse BiasedPN Junction

Reverse Biased: N-side at positive potential wrt. P-side Depletion Region Widens Energy Barrier Height Increases by amount qVA Carriers can not overcome barrier - no diffusion current Diode is “OFF” - BUT, there is a tiny leakage current I0 (~pA)

I0

W(eq.)

W

Page 133: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 24

With the opposite polarity of applied voltage, the N-side is held at a higher potential than the P-side, and the PN junction is reverse biased. Notice that the applied voltage increases the potential hill on the band diagram, and the carriers can not diffuse across the junction. The device is “off”. (A small leakage current does exist through the device, which will be discussed shortly.)

The PN junction behaves like a diode*, an electronic device that conducts current in one direction (polarity) but not the other.

* Note: Not all diodes are PN junctions. Other types of semiconductor diodes exist - e.g. Schottky diode, PIN diode, etc. The right diode for the job depends on the application – they all have the same fundamental behavior characteristic of a diode (e.g. the exponential forward I-V) but differ in the details (e.g. maximum switching speed, etc.). These various diodes are not discussed in this course. However, this course does provide a basic background in device physics, so that you will be able to study and understand these devices (and many others), e.g. by consulting an introductory text on the subject.

Page 134: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 25

Forward Bias, A Closer Look . . .

EC

EV

EFPqVA

EFN

Barrier = q(Vbi - VA)

qVA

Equilibrium (VA=0)Forward Biased

W

qVA

recombination

ElectronDiffusionCurrent

HoleDiffusionCurrent

Ln

from supply

from supply

recombination

LpQuasi-NeutralRegion

Lp= hole minority carrier diffusion lengthLn = electron minority carrier diffusion length

VA

+-

• •

Quasi-NeutralRegion

n(E) = f(E)*gc(E)dE

p(E) = [1-f(E)]*gv(E)dE

Page 135: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 26

A more detailed look at forward bias.

If you understood how equilibrium is achieved in the PN junction, you will recognize forward bias as tipping the scales back in favor of diffusion (vs. drift). The Fermi levels are separated “in the direction of diffusion” by an amount qVA and are held there by the applied bias*. (When the applied bias is removed, the Fermi levels will quickly re-align, restoring equilibrium.) Electrons in the tail of the Fermi distribution with energy greater than the (lowered) barrier diffuse across the junction from N-side to P-side. Similarly, holes diffuse from P-side to N-side.

The electron minority carrier diffusion length (Ln) represents the mean free path of an electron injected into P-type material (i.e. wherein it is the minority carrier). It is how far the electron will travel, on average, before recombining with a hole. Typically, this is on the order of a few microns. Obviously, it depends on the dopant concentration on the P-side (NA) – for heavier doping there are more holes/cm3, so injected electrons will travel a shorter distance on average before recombining. The hole minority carrier diffusion length (Lp) is analogous.

The region within Ln of the depletion region edge on the P-side is called the quasi-neutral region; it is where the recombination takes place. And similarly for holes injected into the N-side.

The power supply provides new carriers to replace those that recombine, thus sustaining the current. Hence, the forward-bias diffusion current is determined by the recombination rate in the quasi-neutral regions. (Note that some recombination also takes place inside the depletion region itself, but this is ignored for the “ideal” diode discussed here.) A higher recombination rate means more current.

Note that the depletion region narrows in forward bias – less uncovered charge is required to sustain the reduced voltage drop (Vbi – VA).

* The applied voltage is shown “connecting to” the Fermi levels on the diagram because it shifts the Fermi distributions relative to each other by an amount qVA (i.e. the electron potential on one side is lower than the other), and the easiest way to represent this is to treat the Fermi level like a “handle” which the applied voltage can grab and slide vertically, translating the entire Fermi distribution with it.

Page 136: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 27

EC

EV

EFPqVAEFN

qVA

qVA

Equilibrium (VA=0)Reverse Biased

W Ln

Quasi-NeutralRegion

LpQuasi-NeutralRegion

electron driftcurrent

hole driftcurrent

thermalgeneration

thermalgeneration

Reverse Bias, A Closer Look . . .Barrier = q(Vbi + VA)

VA

+ -

••

from supply

from supply

Page 137: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 28

A more detailed look at reverse bias.

The Fermi levels are separated and held apart by the applied voltage. The barrier height is increased, thus further inhibiting diffusion current across the junction. If you understood how equilibrium is achieved in the PN junction after contact, you willrecognize reverse bias as tipping the scales in favor of drift (vs. diffusion).

Recall that electrons (minority carriers) are thermally generated throughout the P-side (assume the sample is at room temperature). Those electrons generated inside the quasi-neutral region on the P-side can diffuse to the edge of the depletion region, where theywill be swept across by the electric field. Similarly, holes (minority carriers) thermally generated in the quasi-neutral region on the N-side can diffuse to the edge of the depletion region and be swept across. Thus, a minority carrier drift current exists in the device, referred to as reverse saturation current or leakage current. It is small, however, because the supply of minority carriers in the quasi-neutral regions is small (the current is supply-limited). The reverse current or leakage current is governed by the thermal generation rate. (Note that some generation also takes place inside the depletion region, but this is ignored for the “ideal” diode discussed here.)

Note that the depletion region widens in reverse bias – more charge is required for the larger electric field (Vbi + VA).

Aside: Note that I0 is present in the device under forward bias as well, because thermal generation is always taking place. However, I0 is negligible compared to the diffusion current.

Page 138: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 29

Energy, Voltage, Field, & Charge Revisited

E

xV

x

εx

ρρρρ

+

- x

qND

-qNA

0

0

Vbi+VA

N PW

Electron Energy

Voltage

Electric Field

Charge Density

nDpA xx NN =

E

xV

x

εx

ρρρρ

+

- x

qND

-qNA

0

0

Vbi - VA

N PW

nDpA xx NN =

Reverse Bias Forward Bias

equilibriumapplied bias

-xn xp0 -xn xp0

Page 139: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 30

This graph shows the electron energy, voltage, electric field, and charge density for forward and reverse bias compared to equilibrium. In reverse bias, the energy barrier or “hill” is increased, the voltage drop across the junction in increased (Vbi + VA), the electric field in the depletion region is larger (in magnitude), and the depletion region expands to uncover more charge. Under forward bias, the energy barrier is reduced, the voltage drop across the depletion region is reduced (Vbi – VA), the electric field is smaller (in magnitude), and the depletion region shrinks. (Note that, per our earlier discussion, the idealized “block” charge approximations have been used here for illustration purposes.)

Page 140: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 31

PN Junction - Useful Equations Revisited

Depletion Region Width

VA = applied voltage (equilibrium VA=0; fwd bias VA>0; rev bias VA<0)

Junction Capacitance

DA

DAAbispn

NqNNNVVxxW ))((2 +−=+= ε

+

==

bi

A

js

VV

CW

ACj

121

DA

DAbis

sj

NqNNNV

AC)(2

0+

εwhere

N PW

∆VA → ∆W → ∆Q

∆W∆W

electrons move tocover/uncover P+ ions as needed

holes move tocover/uncover B-ions as needed

)()(2

DAD

AAbisn

NNNN

qVVx

+⋅−= ε

)()(2

DAA

DAbisp

NNNN

qVVx

+⋅−= ε

The following equations are valid for an abrupt (step) junction with uniform doping on both sides.

Page 141: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 32

We revisit our earlier expressions for W and Cj to include the effect of the applied voltage VA. We also take a closer look at how the depletion region responds to changes in applied voltage.

Depletion region width

The equilibrium depletion region width is calculated by setting VA = 0 (no applied voltage). Note that the depletion region widens under reverse bias (VA < 0) and narrows under forward bias (VA > 0), as discussed previously.*

* Aside – Technical Note: This equation is not valid for VA ≥ Vbi , a condition which violates Kirchoff’s voltage law. Since all of the voltage drop occurs across the depletion region for an ideal diode, W = 0 implies that there are no voltage drops in the device. The only way to remove this restriction is to allow for the voltage drops in the quasi-neutral and neutral regions, which are not taken into account for the ideal diode but are in fact present in a real diode.

Junction capacitance

Note that under forward bias (VA > 0), W narrows and the capacitance increases*. Similarly, under reverse bias (VA < 0), W widens and Cj decreases. Thus, the junction capacitance is modulated by the applied voltage. By substituting the expression for W, we can write the expression for Cj in terms of the applied voltage VA, where Cj0 is the zero-bias depletion capacitance discussed previously. In order to tailor Cj to non-idealities or unknowns, such as the junction grading, the exponent of “1/2” in this equation is sometimes replaced with a variable “m”, where m is typically a fitting parameter in the range 1/2 to 1/3.

* Aside – Technical Note: The expression for Cj is valid for small forward-bias voltages up to about Vbi/2. Near this point, the capacitance begins to saturate and then decrease somewhat. This is not reflected in the expression for Cj above.

A Closer Look: An incremental change in applied voltage ∆VA causes majority carriers at both edges of the depletion region to move, covering or uncovering more depletion charge (e.g. B- and P+) as needed to sustain the new voltage (VA ± ∆VA). Thus, the junction has two sheets of charge fluctuating on either side of a dielectric-like region of thickness W, analogous to a common parallel-plate capacitor**. Majority carriers have a very fast response (relaxation) time(~10-10 – 10-12 sec.), and hence can keep pace with even high-frequency changes in VA (e.g. as from a small-amplitude ac signal that superimposes some time-varying ∆VA about some dc bias VA ).

** The depletion region behaves like a dielectric (insulator) because it is a very high-resistance path (i.e. contains very few mobile charge carriers). Under reverse bias, changes in applied voltage cause fluctuations in charge at the outer edges of W, with very little charge flowing across W. Thus, it approximates the behavior of a dielectric. Again, we note that this parallel-plate model is only an approximation; more sophisticated modeling can be done, taking into account the actual charge distribution, fringing capacitance, etc.

Page 142: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 33

PN Junction - Drift & Diffusion Currents

εεεε

µσµσ

pqdriftJnqdriftJ

p

n

p

n

====

)()(

dxdpqDdiffJ

dxdnqDdiffJ

p

n

p

n

−=

=

)(

)(

)()()()(

diffJdriftJJdiffJdriftJJ

ppp

nnn

+=+=

np JJJ += The total current through the junction is the sum of the electron current and hole current.

The electron current, in turn, is made up of drift and diffusion current components. So is the hole current.

The drift current is calculated from Ohm’s Law.

The diffusion current is calculated from Fick’s law.

DN = electron diffusion coefficient [= 33.75 cm2/s for Si at 300 K]Dp = hole diffusion coefficient [=12.4 cm2/s for Si at 300 K]

q = elementary charge (magnitude) = 1.602x10-19 coul.µn = electron mobility [= 1350 cm2/(V.s) for Si, room temp.]µp = hole mobility [= 480 cm2/(V.s) for Si, room temp.]

where:

where:

and:

Page 143: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 34

J is the current density, i.e. the current per unit area through the junction. J = I/A, where I is the current and A is the cross-sectional area of the junction.

The total current through the junction is the sum of the electron current through the junction and the hole current through the junction.

The electron current, in turn, is made up of the electron drift current and the electron diffusion current. The hole current is made up of the hole drift current and the hole diffusion current. (Note that at equilibrium the drift and diffusion components are equal but opposite, maintaining a dynamic equilibrium and zero net current.)

The drift current can be calculated from Ohm’s Law. In the previous module, we used Ohm’s Law in the form V = I R. Here, we

use it in the equivalent form J = σε, where σ is the conductivity (discussed in the previous module) and ε is the electric field.

(To convert this back to the form V = I R, simply make the substitutions R=ρL/A, σ=1/ρ, and ε = V/L.)

The diffusion current can be calculated from Fick’s first law of diffusion, which states that the diffusion rate (particles per unit area per unit time) is directly proportional to the concentration gradient (dn/dx or dp/dx). The proportionality constant, D, is called the diffusion constant. Multiplying by q (the elementary charge) puts it in terms of coulombs per unit area per unit time, or current density. (The negative sign in the hole diffusion equation results from the fact that the hole concentration gradient is in a direction opposite to the electron concentration gradient).

Page 144: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 35

VA

I

Forward Bias(On)

Reverse Bias(Off / Leakage)

I0

0

Ideal Diode: I-V Characteristic

Ideal Diode - Current-Voltage Characteristic

Dn = electron diffusion coefficient [= 33.75 cm2/s at 300 K]Dp = hole diffusion coefficient [=12.4 cm2/s at 300 K]Ln = electron minority carrier diffusion length [~ 10 µm]Lp = hole minority carrier diffusion length [~10 µm]

−= 1exp0 Tk

qVIIB

A

+=Dp

p

An

ni NL

DNL

DqAI n 20

Ideal Diode: Reverse saturation/leakage current

qTkD B=

µ

Diffusion coefficient can be calculated from mobility

(Einstein relationship) VA

+-

I

N P

VA

+ -

I0

N P

diode circuit symbol

Page 145: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 36

The preceding current equations can be combined with the following assumptions to derive the ideal diode equation.

The ideal diode has the following assumptions:

• Abrupt PN junction, uniformly and nondegenerately doped on each side.

• Low-level injection (np << pp and pn << nn ). Under forward bias, the concentration of electrons being injected into the P-side (np) as minority carriers is small compared to the concentration of holes (majority carriers) present in the P-side (pp) (note that pp ≈ NA). And similarly for holes being injected into the N-side. The basic idea is that the amount of minority carrier injection is small, so the concentration of minority carriers in the quasi-neutral regions remains small compared to the concentration of majority carriers, and recombination is very efficient.

• No series resistance. All of the voltage drop is assumed to occur across the depletion region. There is no resistance in the bulk (neutral) or quasi-neutral regions, contacts, etc.

• No generation/recombination in depletion region (only in quasi-neutral regions).

• No external sources of carriers. e.g. no illumination, etc.

Note that the reverse saturation/leakage current is constant wrt. applied voltage; increasing the reverse-bias voltage makes the slope of the band diagram steeper, but this does not change the current, which is supply-limited by the thermal generation rate in the quasi-neutral regions (see next slide). Band gap dependence: I0 is larger for a semiconductor material with a smaller band gap EG (because ni is larger). Temperature dependence: I0 is larger for higher temperature (because ni increases exponentially with temperature). Doping dependence: Note that doping either (or both) sides more heavily will reduce the minority carrier concentration (per np = ni2) and hence I0.

The forward-bias current increases exponentially with applied voltage. If you visualize the Fermi distribution superimposed on the band diagram, and then visualize lowering the barrier down this distribution’s tail, you can understand qualitatively why the forward current is exponential wrt. applied voltage, as opposed to linear (ohmic) or sub-linear. You can also see why the “knee” of the forward-bias I-V occurs near VA = Vbi, where the barrier height is reduced to zero. Increasing the voltage even a small amount beyond this point results in a very sharp increase in current. The PN junction is sometimes referred to as a rectifying contact (as opposed to an ohmic contact), because the forward-bias voltage drop across the device is limited to (approximately) the knee voltage, as the sharply-increasing portion of the I-V curve shows.

Page 146: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 37

Reverse Current - Analogy

I0

I0

I0

I0

I0

I0h

h

q(Vbi + VA)

q(Vbi + VA)I0

I0

I0

I0I0

I0

waterfall

reverse-biasedPN junction

Page 147: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 38

An analogy to explain why the reverse-bias current is saturated, i.e. constant wrt. the applied voltage.

Consider a river with current I0. Assume the river flows over a short waterfall: the current flowing down the waterfall and out of the base of the waterfall must also be I0 (unless there is a large elephant drinking water at the bottom!). Now, assume that same river encounters a tall waterfall instead of the short one. Still, it is the case that the water flowing down the waterfall and out of the base of the waterfall is I0 (water is not being added or removed anywhere along the path). Basically, the current is supply-limited, and the height of the waterfall has nothing to do with the amount of current. The height does influence the speed (kinetic energy) with which water hits the bottom. Sitting under the short waterfall on a hot day might be pleasant, sitting under the tall one might be painful - the water gains more kinetic energy, because it falls (accelerates) longer.

Similarly, increasing the reverse bias on a PN junction increases the height of the potential hill on the band diagram, but this does not change the current (i.e. the number of electrons flowing down the hill per unit time), only the amount of kinetic energy theelectrons gain in crossing the junction. (If they gain too much kinetic energy, this can cause problems, as discussed later.) Like the waterfall example, the current in a reverse-biased PN junction is supply-limited, and is not influenced by the height of the hill.

Page 148: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 39

PN Junction Diode - Non-Idealities

source: S.M. Sze, Physics of Semiconductor Devices, John Wiley & Sons, 1981, p. 91; and G.W. Pierret, Modular Series on Solid State Devices, vol. 2, Addison-Wesley Publishing, 1988, p. 83-85.

−− += 11

20

0 expexp2 Tkn

qVWqAnTnk

qVIIB

Ai

B

A

τ

Generation / Recombination in Depletion Region

Deviations from the ideal:

n = diode ideality factor [n = 1 for ideal diode, n > 1 for non-ideal]n2 = a slope factor for the second term [n2 → 2 is typical]τn = electron minority carrier lifetime [~1µs typical]τp = hole minority carrier lifetime [~1µs typical]τ0 = effective (average) minority carrier lifetime

Forward bias (VA > 0): Exponential increase in recombination current. Reverse bias (VA < 0): Increase in generation current goes as W ~ √VA.

(f)

| J/J

0|

ppp

nnn

DL

DL

τ

τ

≡aside:

20

pn τττ +=where

Ideality Factor

q|VA|/kBT

slope = q/nkBT(n = 1 for ideal)

slope = q/n2kBT

slope ≈ q/2kBT

IRs

~√VA VBR

Page 149: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 40

The ideal diode model is simple, but not realistic enough. This graph compares an ideal diode I-V to a real one. Note that the vertical axis is current density (i.e. J = I/A). It is normalized to (divided by) the reverse saturation or leakage current density, denoted J0. Also note that it is the absolute value (magnitude) of the current, hence the forward-bias and reverse-bias I-V’s fit nicely into the same quadrant of the graph. Also note that the horizontal axis is q|VA|/kBT, essentially a constant multiplied by the applied voltage (magnitude).

Different portions of the I-V curve are labeled to highlight the differences between the ideal diode and a real one. An ideality factor, n, is introduced into the exponential term of the ideal diode equation to take into account deviations from the ideal forward-bias I-V slope (n = 1 for an ideal diode, and real diodes typically have n in the range of 1 to 2). This ideality factor takes into account non-idealities in the diode structure or fabrication – e.g. the grading of the junction, which may be difficult to determine (assumed abrupt for the ideal diode). A second term has been added to the ideal diode equation to account for generation and recombination in the depletion region (more on this below).

Non-Idealities - Reverse Bias:

e. Generation in the depletion region.* Thermal generation takes place inside the depletion region of a (real) PN junction (i.e. electron-hole pairs are liberated from Si-Si bonds, at some rate determined by the temperature). Under reverse bias, these carriers are swept out by the electric field and contribute to the reverse current; hence the reverse current is higher than that of the ideal diode (which ignores generation in the depletion region). Furthermore, recall that in reverse bias W widens as √VA. As W widens, generation takes place throughout a larger volume, and hence the reverse current also increases as √VA, as shown on the graph. This is also captured in the equation presented above: For reverse bias (VA < 0), the expression rapidly reduces to -(I0 + qAniW/2τ0). The first term is of course the ideal reverse saturation current. The second term is the generation current one would expect assuming that thermal generation takes place uniformly throughout the depletion region at a constant rate (determined by the temperature). The constants τn and τp are the electron and hole minority carrier lifetimes, respectively. The lifetime is a measure of how long an excess minority carrier will “survive” in a sea of majority carriers – i.e. if a minority carrier is generated in a sea of majority carriers, it will exist for a time τ (statistically) before recombining. (Note the relationship between the minority carrier diffusion length L and the minority carrier lifetime τ.) The value of τ can vary widely depending on the fabrication details of the PN junction; it can take on values ~1ns to ~1ms, with typical values ~1µs. Note also that any impurities (mid-gap states/traps) present in the depletion region can act as generation centers and increase to reverse current.

f. Junction breakdown. When the reverse-bias voltage reaches the breakdown voltage (VA = VBR), a large reverse current is observed. This phenomenon is discussed in detail later.

Non-Idealities - Forward bias:

a. Recombination in the depletion region.* Electrons and holes traversing the junction under forward bias recombine in the depletion region (this was ignored for the ideal diode). Recall that each time a recombination event occurs in the device, new carriers are supplied by the battery or power supply. Therefore, an increase in recombination rate necessitates an increase in the current through the device. The second term in the equation accounts for recombination in the depletion region, which increases exponentially with forward-bias (VA > 0), because the concentration of carriers crossing the junction increases exponentially. This term also contains a slope-fitting parameter, n2 (n2 → 2 is typical). This effect is most pronounced at lower applied voltages, before the depletion region shrinks too much (W ~ √(Vbi – VA) → 0 for forward bias, causing the second term in the equation to disappear leaving only the ideal diode term – this corresponds to the (a)-to-(b) transition on the graph). Note that any impurities (mid-gap states/traps) present in the depletion region can act as recombination centers, contributing to the recombination current.

b. Ideal behavior. In this region of the I-V, the ideal diode assumptions hold up very well.

c. High-injection. The low-level injection assumption of the ideal diode does not hold at higher applied voltages. High-injection of carriers across the junction reduces the recombination efficiency (np → pp and pn → nn in the quasi-neutral regions), hence reducing the current through the device vs. the ideal diode.

d. Series resistance. The ideal diode assumes that all of the voltage drop occurs across the depletion region; i.e. the bulk regions and contacts have zero resistance. In a real diode, the resistance of these regions can not be ignored. It can be modeled as a resistor Rs in series with the junction. For a given applied voltage VA, the voltage drop across this parasitic resistance (IRs ) reduces the voltage drop across the junction (Vj = VA - IRs) and hence reduces the current. This effect is most pronounced at high currents, where the IRs drop is greater. Whereas the ideal diode equation predicts unrealistically large currents for forward biasing beyond the “knee” voltage, in reality the current is ultimately limited by the series resistance effects.

* Generation and recombination in the depletion region can be thought of as a natural “restoring force” in the PN junction. When the carrier concentrations are reduced from their equilibrium values in the general vicinity of the junction by a reverse-bias (widening of the depletion region), generation increases in an effort to increase the carrier concentrations back toward their equilibrium values. Similarly, when the carrier concentrations in the depletion region are elevated by carrier injection due to forward bias, recombination increases so as to reduce them back toward their equilibrium values.

Page 150: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 41

PN Junction Diode - Reverse Breakdown

VA

I

Forward BiasReverse Bias

I0

0VBR

JunctionBreakdown

εCR = critical field for impact ionization [= 4x105 V/cm for Si]

Avalanche Breakdown Voltage

DA

DACRBR

NNNN

qV ε +=

2sε

2

Increasing the doping on either or both sides of the junction decreases the breakdown voltage.

Page 151: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 42

A large current arises when VA = VBR , called the reverse breakdown voltage or junction breakdown voltage. Note that breakdown is not necessarily destructive to the diode.

There are two mechanisms for junction breakdown:1. Avalanche Breakdown (impact ionization) - most common2. Zener Breakdown (tunneling) - if both sides of junction are heavily doped

Page 152: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 43

PN Junction Diode - Reverse Breakdown (cont.)

**

**

Si

Si

EC

EV

impactionizationevents

an impactionizationevent

electron-holepair creation

|VA| > |VBR|

+

-

EC

EV

+

-directband-to-bandtunneling

EC

EV

|VA| > |VBR|

narrowbands

from supply

electron-holepair creation

Avalanche Breakdown Zener Breakdown

both sides heavily doped

Page 153: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 44

Avalanche breakdown begins when the applied reverse-bias voltage is so large that the minority carriers traversing the depletion region gain sufficient kinetic energy to cause impact ionization. Impact ionization occurs when an energetic (aka. “hot”) carrier collides with a Si atom, breaking Si-Si covalent bonds and forming electron-hole pairs. These electrons and holes are then accelerated by the high electric field, and can go on to cause subsequent impact ionization events – i.e. an “avalanche” of energetic carriers, causing a large reverse current. Note that impact ionization is typically caused by electrons; holes have a lower mobility and are difficult to accelerate to impact ionization speed. Note also that the breakdown voltage decreases as the doping concentration on either or both sides of the junction increases. Increasing the doping concentration will increase the difference between the Fermi levels (EFN and EFP), thus creating a larger built-in voltage (potential hill) when they are combined to form the junction. This larger built-in voltage means that less reverse-bias voltage is required to accelerate carriers to ionization speeds, hence a lower breakdown voltage is observed for the device.

Zener breakdown occurs in PN junctions which are heavily doped on both sides. The band “stretching” becomes so severe that direct band-to-band tunneling occurs. This results in a reverse “tunnel” current.

Page 154: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 45

PN Junction Diode - One-Sided Junction

PN+P+

P+

P+

+ -

B-

B-

W

ND >> NA

B-

A

Abis

qNVVW )(2 −= ε

A

CRsBR

qNV

2

2εε=

P+N P+

+

B-

B-

B-

W

-P+

P+

NA >> ND

D

Abis

qNVVW )(2 −= ε

εbi εbi

D

CRsBR

qNV

2

2εε=

Page 155: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 46

A one-sided junction means that one side is doped heavily (degenerately) and the other is not. The “+” indicates the heavily-doped side (note: the “+” has nothing to do with electrical charge in this case, it only indicates which side is heavily doped). The PN junctions shown above are one-sided abrupt (step) junctions.

Aside: In module 4, we will see that the source and drain regions of the transistor (MOSFET) are one-sided PN junctions.

The equations for the depletion region width and breakdown voltage can be simplified, as shown. Note that they are more sensitive to the doping concentration on the lighter-doped side of the junction. The depletion region is contained mostly in the lighter-doped side (recall that NAxp = NDxn for charge neutrality), therefore the voltage drop occurs mostly in this side, and this side dominates the electrical characteristics of the diode. This side will also have a higher minority carrier concentration (per np = ni2), and thus the larger leakage current component of I0.

Page 156: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 47

Breakdown Voltage vs. Dopant Concentration

source: S.M. Sze, Physics of Semiconductor Devices, John Wiley & Sons, 1981.

Page 157: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 48

This graph shows the avalanche breakdown voltage vs. dopant concentration for a one-sided abrupt PN junction (NB denotes the dopant concentration on the lighter-doped side of the junction). The dashed line indicates the dopant concentration beyond which the Zener (tunneling) mechanism will dominate the voltage breakdown characteristic.

Page 158: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 49

Aside: Linearly Graded Junction

ρρρρ

+- x0

-xn xp

N P

xj

W

metallurgical junction (NA = ND)

NA - ND

x0

slope = a

0=−=

ρρ qax for -xn ≤ x ≤ xp

otherwise

−=

qaVV AbiS

W)(12 3

1

ε

=i

oBbi

naW

qTkV

2ln2

WAC S

jε=

aqs

CBRV 2

121

23 2

34 −

=

εε

where W0 is the equilibrium depletion region width (VA = 0)

NA – ND = ax

x

NA(x)

~ abrupt junction

gradedjunction

ND

xj(abrupt)

xj(graded)

~ linearly gradedjunction

xND

NA(x)

Sisurface

abrupt graded

implant profiles

εεεεx

−=

DtDtAQxN x

A4

exp)(2

π

illustration of shallow (abrupt)vs. deep (graded) junction

abrupt junction (for comparison)

Page 159: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 50

Up to this point, we have been considering abrupt (step) junctions, where the doping concentration, and hence the charge, change abruptly (step function) at the metallurgical junction (xj). We now examine what happens when non-abrupt junctions are formed.

For example, consider the common case where a P-type dopant such as boron is implanted into the surface of an N-type region, as illustrated above. (The situation for N-type dopant implanted into a P-type region is analogous.) As implanted, the boron lies in a thin sheet in the Si surface. Subsequent thermal cycles will cause the boron atoms to diffuse, driving them deeper into the sample (and laterally as well – diffusion is three dimensional). The boron concentration profile NA(x) is depicted in the graph above and described by the Gaussian function shown, where Q is the implant dose in atoms/cm2 (the area under the curve), A is the implanted area, x is the depth into the sample (x = 0 denotes the Si surface in this equation), t is the total time for which diffusion has taken place, and D is the diffusion coefficient* in cm2/s (depends on the dopant species and the semiconductor material, and increases exponentially with temperature). The metallurgical junction is defined as the point where NA = ND. Higher temperature and/or longer diffusion time are conducive to diffusion and result in a greater (deeper) junction depth. Also note that smaller atoms like boron have a higher diffusion coefficient than larger atoms such as indium or arsenic.

The profile for a shallow junction is shown on the graph, where the implanted boron is not diffused much into the sample (e.g. a shallow implant followed by rapid thermal annealing). This maybe treated as an abrupt junction - e.g. the source and drain regions of a MOSFET (discussed in module 4).

However, if the implanted boron is diffused deeper into the sample the result is a graded junction profile, where the net doping (NA – ND) changes gradually near the junction**. Shown above is the special case of a linearly graded junction, where the net doping changes linearly (NA – ND = ax) in the vicinity of the junction and hence the charge density is modeled as two triangular regions (where ρ = -qax). a is called the grading constant and has units of cm-4 (i.e. cm-3 per cm of x). The symmetry of the linearly graded junction requires that xn = -W/2 and xp = W/2 always (as measured from the metallurgical junction). Grading the junction tends to make the electric field parabolic instead of triangular, and reduces the peak field.

Expressions are given above for the depletion region width, built-in voltage, junction capacitance, and reverse breakdown voltage of a linearly graded junction. Note that W has a cube-root relation to the applied voltage, vs. the square-root relation for the abrupt junction. Also note that the expression for W contains Vbi, and visa versa, and thus an iterative solution is required forthese quantities.

Qualitatively, the physics of the graded junction is the same as for the abrupt junction (forward and reverse bias, diffusion and drift current, recombination/generation, reverse breakdown, etc.) but the quantitative details change, as reflected in the mathematical expressions above for the special case of a linearly graded junction, where the grading constant a emerges as an important quantity. The ideal diode model also assumed an abrupt junction, as noted at the time, but again the qualitative shape of the I-V characteristic remains the same, and the ideality factor n can be used to adjust for junction grading (in practice no junction is perfectly abrupt).

• Previously, we encountered the diffusion coefficients/constants for the mobile charge carriers - electrons (Dn) and holes (Dp) - as they pertain to carrier diffusion inside a PN junction. Here, we are using the diffusion coefficient of the dopant atom (D) - in this example, the diffusion of boron atoms in order to form a PN junction in N-type material. Although they are related, in that they both arise from Fick’s first law of diffusion, be careful not to confuse them – one pertains to the diffusion at the atomic level to form a PN junction in the first place, the other pertains to the diffusion of electrons and holes in an established junction.

** When P-type dopant is added to a region that is already N-type, or visa versa, this is called compensation. In other words, the effective doping concentration is the net doping concentration |NA - ND|.

Page 160: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 51

Aside: Non-Uniformly Doped Silicon

EC

EV

Ei

EF

x

n(x) = ND(x)

lower doping concentration

higher doping concentrationN-type Si

Ψ=

−=

−=

−=

Tkq

TkEE

nn

TkEEnn

TkEEnn

BB

ii

B

iFi

B

iFi

1221

1

2

22

11

expexp

exp

exp

1 2

Page 161: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 52

This is a topic that properly belongs in module 1. However, it was deferred to this point because we are now in a much better position to tackle it, having discussed such topics as band bending, Fermi level alignment at equilibrium, etc.

Shown above is a case where the doping concentration (ND) varies with position (x) in a silicon sample. In the extrinsic temperature region (e.g. near room temperature), it follows that n(x) = ND(x). The doping concentration gets higher in the direction of increasing x, and hence so does the free electron concentration.

The band diagram shows how the bands bend to reflect the changing dopant concentration. To the left (smaller x) the dopant concentration is lower, thus the free electron concentration is lower, and thus the Fermi level is farther from EC (closer to Ei) on the band diagram. To the right (larger x) the sample is doped more heavily, so the electron concentration is greater, and the Fermi level is closer to EC (farther from Ei). Note that the sample is at equilibrium, so the Fermi level EF is flat throughout the sample. The Fermi level is like the water surface of a lake – it is flat (at equilibrium) regardless of the contour of the bottom of the lake. (Similar to the PN junction, the shape of this band diagram can be constructed visually by considering thin “slices” of progressively heavier-doped samples being assembled from left to right. The bands between two adjacent “slices” will bend such that the Fermi levels align at equilibrium. When this is done for all “slices” throughout the sample, the band diagram shown in the bottom diagram is the result. The band diagram for any arbitrary doping profile -- N-type, P-type, or both (e.g. compensation or a junction) -- can be constructed using this method.)

Note that there are bent bands at equilibrium, indicating that there is a non-zero built-in electrostatic potential in the sample at equilibrium. (This is analogous to the built-in voltage of a PN junction.)

Per the discussion in module 1, we can write expressions for the electron concentration at two arbitrary points 1 and 2 as shownabove. These can then be combined to get the ratio of the electron concentrations at these two points. The quantity Ei1 – Ei2 can be expressed in terms of Ψ12, the electrostatic potential difference between the two points. In other words, the electrostatic potential difference is Ψ = ∆Ei/q (= ∆EC/q = ∆EV/q ). (More on electrostatic potential in module 3.)

Page 162: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 53

Exercise: Back-to-Back PN Junctions

N P N

In the space below, draw the band diagram for this structure at equilibrium.

E B C

Page 163: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 54

Draw the band diagram for this N-P-N structure at equilibrium (assume that the sample is at room temperature, that each region is uniformly doped, and that both junctions are abrupt). Hint: Remember that the Fermi levels must be aligned at equilibrium.Don’t worry too much about the quantitative details, just try to get the qualitative picture right.

Label the depletion regions and built-in voltages on your diagram.

Page 164: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 55

Exercise: Back-to-Back PN Junctions (cont.)

N P N

E B C

Draw the band diagram for this structure (E-B junction forward biased and B-C junction reverse biased).

VBC

+-

VEB

+-

Page 165: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 56

Suppose the device is constructed such that the P-region is much narrower than Ln (the minority carrier diffusion length of electrons). If we forward bias the E-to-B junction and reverse bias the B-to-C junction (see diagram), what would happen? Specifically, would current flow through the device from E to C?

Have you ever seen this device before?

Page 166: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 57

Exercise: Solution

N P N

E B C

EC

EF

EV

W

qVbi

W

••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

oooooooooooooooooo

qVbi

EC

EF

EVooooooooooooooo

••••••••••••••

••••••••••••••

Equilibrium

Applied Voltages

Page 167: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / PN Junction / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 2 - 58

When the E-B junction is forward biased, electrons flow from E to B. Since the B region is narrower than Ln, the electrons diffuse through the B region (most of them, anyway) and are swept into the C region by the reverse-biased B-C junction. Hence, electrons flow from E to C under these biasing conditions.

This device is called a Bipolar Junction Transistor, or BJT. Specifically, it is an NPN BJT. (A PNP BJT can also be constructed, and its behavior is analogous, though the voltage polarities are opposite and the current is dominated by holes.)

The region labeled E is called the Emitter – under forward bias it emits or injects carriers into the B region, which is called the Base. Most of the carriers diffuse across the base and are swept into the C region, called the Collector. A small fraction of them recombine in the base, giving rise to a small base current. In typical applications, the (small) base current is used to control the (larger) current flow through the device. Thus, the BJT behaves like an amplifier (i.e. the emitter-to-collector current is an amplification of the much smaller base current). In digital electronics applications, the analog nature of the emitter-to-base current is ignored, and the device is treated like a simple switch - i.e. on (conducting current) or off (not conducting).

Later, in module 4, we will study transistors, though our focus will be on a related but different style of transistor called the MOSFET. While the physics of the BJT and the MOSFET are quite different, understanding PN junctions (and this N-P-N band diagram) will help us understand the MOSFET.

Page 168: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 1

3The

MOS Capacitor

Page 169: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 2

This is the third module in a five-module introduction to semiconductor devices. The modules are:

1. Electronic Properties of Silicon

2. The PN Junction

3. The MOS Capacitor

4. The MOSFET

5. Small Circuits

Understanding the MOS capacitor is a key step toward understanding the MOSFET transistor, because the gate region of the MOSFET is a MOS capacitor. The MOS capacitor is also an important semiconductor device in its own right, with a variety of applications in microelectronic circuits.

Objectives of this module:

• Understand the band diagram for an ideal MOS capacitor

• Understand accumulation, depletion, inversion, and strong inversion (threshold)

• Understand the surface potential, and its relationship to the gate voltage and threshold voltage

• Understand how gate oxide thickness and substrate doping affect the surface potential and threshold voltage

• Understand how C-V testing is performed, and explain the shape of the C-V curve

• Understand the band diagram for a real (non-ideal) MOS capacitor, including the work function mismatch, flatband voltage, and oxide charge effects

• Understand all of the above for both a P-type MOS capacitor and an N-type MOS capacitor

Looking Back: We are prepared to study the MOS capacitor because we understand the electronic properties of N-type and P-type silicon from the first module.

Looking Ahead: We will combine our knowledge of the MOS capacitor with our prior study of the PN junction to understand how a transistor (MOSFET) works.

Page 170: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 3

P-type

Metal (aka. the Gate)Oxide (aka. the Gate Oxide)Semiconductor

MOS Capacitor (Ideal) - Equilibrium

Three possible biasing regimes:• Accumulation• Depletion• Inversion

Page 171: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 4

“MOS” is short for Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor.

A capacitor is a circuit element which stores charge.

The MOS capacitor is formed using a metal such as aluminum for the “top plate” or gate, silicon dioxide (SiO2) as the dielectric or gate oxide, and a semiconductor material such as silicon (N-type or P-type) as the “bottom plate” or substrate.

We will use P-type silicon for illustration, then summarize for the N-type case by analogy at the end of the discussion.

There are three possible biasing conditions for a MOS capacitor; they are called accumulation, depletion, and inversion. We will study each in detail.

Page 172: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 5

MOS Capacitor - Accumulation

+

-VG

- - - - - - -

P-type

MOS o o o o o o o

Holes accumulate underneath the oxide to balance the charge on the metal/gate - surface “looks” more P-type

ps > NA

ps = hole concentration at semiconductor surface (cm-3)

Page 173: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 6

The MOS capacitor is biased into accumulation when the gate is held at a negative potential relative to the substrate.

Recall that P-type material has an abundance of holes (the majority carrier). The negative bias on the gate causes holes to accumulate underneath the gate oxide at the surface of the semiconductor. However, the holes can not travel through the oxide to the negative terminal, because it is an insulator (dielectric) and hence is not conductive. The holes remain accumulated underneath the oxide. The more voltage applied, the greater the accumulation.

The surface of the semiconductor “looks” more P-type than the bulk, i.e. ps > NA, where ps is the concentration of holes at the surface and NA is the dopant concentration in the P-type semiconductor.

Page 174: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 7

+

- VG

+ + + + + + +

P-type

B- B- B- B- B- B- B- W

MOS

VG < VTDepletion

DepletionRegion

QG = -QDUncovered charge in the depletion region (QD) balances charge on gate (QG)

QD = qANAW Charge in the depletion region(A = gate area)

As VG increases → QG increases → W increases → QD increases → QG = QD

MOS Capacitor - Depletion

Page 175: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 8

When the gate is held at a positive potential relative to the substrate, the MOS capacitor is biased into depletion (provided that the applied voltage is not greater than some threshold voltage, VT, described later). Holes are repelled from the semiconductor surface by the positive charge on the gate, and thus the surface is depleted of majority carriers, leaving only the uncovered boron dopantatoms. The charge in this depletion region balances the gate charge. As the applied voltage is increased, the depletion regionwidens, uncovering more charge to maintain this balance.

The applied voltage drops across the gate oxide and the depletion region.

Page 176: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 9

+

- VG

+ + + + + + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + +

P-type

B- B- B- B- B- B- B- W(wider)

MOS

B- B- B- B- B- B- B-

• • • • • • •

VG →→→→ VTInversion Electrons (minority carriers) pile up

underneath the oxide → surface “looks” N-type → surface inversion

+

- VG

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + +

P-type

B- B- B- B- B- B- B- W = WT(maximum)

MOS

B- B- B- B- B- B- B-

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •

VG = VTStrongInversion (Threshold)

Surface looks as N-type as bulk is P-type → strong inversion → threshold voltage

MOS Capacitor - Inversion

QG = - (QD + Qn)

Depletion region reaches its maximum width (WT) at threshold

Page 177: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 10

As the applied voltage is increased further, electrons (minority carriers) begin to pile up underneath the gate oxide, forming an inversion layer. The semiconductor surface is now starting to “look” N-type, hence the term “inversion”. Now, the charge on the gate is balanced by the charge in the depletion region and the charge in the inversion layer.

When the threshold voltage (VT) is reached, the surface is “as N-type as the bulk is P-type”; i.e. the concentration of electrons in the inversion layer (ns) is equal to the concentration of holes in the bulk substrate (NA). This will be a very important concept when we discuss the transistor (MOSFET).

Page 178: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 11

+

- VG

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

P-type

B- B- B- B- B- B- B- W = WT(maximum)

MOS

B- B- B- B- B- B- B-

••••••••••••••••••••••••

VG > VTBeyond Threshold

MOS Capacitor - Inversion (cont.)

Page 179: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 12

As the applied gate voltage increases beyond threshold, the surface becomes more strongly inverted (ns increases).

Note that beyond threshold further increases in gate charge are compensated by increasing charge in the inversion layer; the depletion region has reached its maximum width (W = WT) at threshold.

Page 180: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 13

EC

EV

EFS

Ei

delocalized electrons

EFM

qφM qφS

EC

EV

EG(SiO2) ≈ 9 eV EG(Si) = 1.1eV

EVAC

MOS Capacitor (Ideal) - Band Diagram, Isolated Materials

M O S

EVAC = vacuum level (free electron)φM = metal work functionφS = semiconductor work function

P-Type

Ideal MOS Capacitor: φφφφM = φφφφS

Page 181: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 14

We can construct an energy band diagram for the MOS capacitor. We will first consider an ideal MOS capacitor.

We begin by considering the band diagrams of the isolated components, before they are brought into contact. A work function φ is defined for both the metal and the semiconductor; it is a measure of the amount of energy required to remove an electron from the material entirely (i.e. to the vacuum level, EVAC), and is measured from the Fermi level as shown. For an ideal MOS capacitor, we assume that φM = φS (note that this is equivalent to assuming that the Fermi levels line up).

Aside: If you are familiar with the photoelectric effect, you might have seen the work function φbefore. Albert Einstein received the Nobel Prize in Physics for his theoretical explanation of the photoelectric effect in the early 1900’s. The photoelectric effect occurs when ultraviolet light is shined onto a metal surface, causing electrons to be “knocked out” of the metal surface by the incident photons. If the incident light is of frequency ν, then the photon energy is E = hν (where h is Planck’s constant), and the kinetic energy of the electrons emitted from the metal is E = hν - φ, where φ is the work function of the metal. In other words, φ is the minimum amount of energy required to pull an electron out of the metal, and any additional energy supplied by the photon is turned into the kinetic energy of the electron (in accordance with the conservation of energy).

Page 182: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 15

EC

EV

EFS

Ei

EFM

EVAC

M O S

MOS Capacitor (Ideal) - Band Diagram, Equilibrium

Ideal MOS Capacitor: φφφφM = φφφφS

P-type

MOS

qφM qφS

EG(SiO2)EG(Si)

Page 183: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 16

The materials are brought into contact to form the MOS capacitor. The Fermi levels align at equilibrium (analogous to the PN junction discussion). Because we assume that the work functions are equal for the ideal case, there is no band bending (all energy bands are flat) at equilibrium.

Page 184: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 17

EC

EV

EFS

EiEFM

M O S

- +

ε, VG

qVOX

Holes (majority carriers) accumulate underneath the oxide to compensate the gate charge → surface “looks” more P-type (ps > NA)

MOS Capacitor (Ideal) - Band Diagram, Accumulation

+

-VG

- - - - - - -

P-type

MOS o o o o o o o

-QG

+Qp

M O S

EG(Si)

Page 185: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 18

When the MOS capacitor is biased into accumulation, band bending occurs as shown (the potential energy of electrons in the semiconductor is lowered wrt. the metal). Recall that hole energy increases downward on a band diagram (“holes like to float”). Therefore, they follow the energy gradient and accumulate at the semiconductor surface, as previously discussed.

Recall that a voltage drop exists where bands are bent, i.e. across the oxide and the semiconductor surface. No voltage drop exists where bands are flat.

The charge is represented in the upper right diagram. The negative charge on the gate is compensated by the equal but opposite charge in the accumulation layer.

Page 186: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 19

EC

EV

EFS

Ei

EFM

M O S

qΨS-+

WDepletionRegion

qVOX

VG = VOX + ΨΨΨΨS

qΨS

qφB

MOS Capacitor (Ideal) - Band Diagram, Depletion

0 < VG < VT

VOX = voltage drop across oxideΨS = surface potential (voltage drop across W)

+

- VG

+ + + + + + +

P-type

B- B- B- B- B- B- B- W

MOS

W

+QG

-QD

M O S

ε, VG

EG(Si)

Page 187: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 20

In depletion, the bands bend as shown (the potential energy of electrons in the semiconductor are raised wrt. the metal).

Note that the electric field (voltage) drops across the oxide and the depletion region (where the bands are sloped). VOX is the voltage drop across the oxide. ΨS is the surface potential, and represents the voltage drop across the depletion region of the semiconductor. Therefore, VG = VOX + ΨS.

The quantity φB on the band diagram is the bulk potential (sometimes called the Fermi potential), the difference between the Fermilevel and the intrinsic Fermi level in the bulk of the semiconductor (i.e. far away from the surface, in the neutral region).

The charge diagram shows that the positive charge on the gate is balanced by the equal but opposite charge in the depletion region.

Page 188: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 21

EC

EV

EFS

Ei

EFM

M O S

qΨΨΨΨS

-+

ε, VG

qVOX

VG = VOX + ΨΨΨΨS

qφB

MOS Capacitor (Ideal) - Band Diagram, Inversion

W(wider)

Ei dips below EF → surface “looks”N-type → onset of surface inversion

VG →→→→ VT ΨΨΨΨS →→→→ 2φφφφB+

- VG

+ + + + + + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + +

P-type

B- B- B- B- B- B- B- W(wider)

MOS

B- B- B- B- B- B- B-

• • • • • • •W→WT

+QG

-QD

M O S

-Qn

−Ψ=

−Ψ=Tk

qNTk

qnnB

BSA

B

BSis

)2(exp)(exp φφ

Page 189: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 22

As VG gets closer to VT, electrons (minority carriers) begin to pile up at the silicon surface underneath the oxide, following the gradient of the band diagram. These electrons come from thermal generation inside the depletion region.

The equation above relates the surface electron concentration ns to ΨS and φB. Note that for ΨS = φB, ns = ni (and hence EF = Ei at the surface) as expected. This point where the surface looks intrinsic is the demarcation between depletion and inversion. As ΨSincreases beyond this “intrinsic” point, Ei dips below EF near the surface, indicating that the surface now looks N-type. This is called surface inversion.

The charge diagram shows that the charge on the gate is now compensated by the depletion charge and the the inversion charge. An incremental increase in gate charge causes both to increase somewhat to compensate.

* Note also that ns is not actually zero in depletion, but it is negligibly small - ns is much less than NA for ΨS << 2φB (negative exponent).

Page 190: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 23

EC

EV

EFS

Ei

EFM

M O S

qΨΨΨΨS -+

qVOX

VG = VOX + ΨΨΨΨS

qφB

MOS Capacitor (Ideal) - Band Diagram, Strong Inversion (Threshold)

W = WT(maximum )

VG = VT ΨΨΨΨS = 2φφφφB

ΨS = 2φB → surface is as N-type as the bulk is P-type (ns = NA) → “strong”inversion → threshold voltage

+

- VG

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + +

P-type

B- B- B- B- B- B- B- W = WT(maximum)

MOS

B- B- B- B- B- B- B-

• • • • • • • • • • • • • •WT

+QG

-Qn

-QD

M O S

ε, VG

−Ψ=

−Ψ=Tk

qNTk

qnnB

BSA

B

BSis

)2(exp)(exp φφ

Page 191: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 24

At threshold, Ei lies as far below EF at the surface as it does above EF in the bulk. In other words, the surface is as N-type as the bulk is P-type (ns = NA), and ΨS = 2φB. This is one common definition of the threshold voltage*.

*Technical Note: “Strong” inversion is sometimes defined as ΨS = 2φB + 6kBT/q (and hence ΨS = 2φB is “moderate” inversion). (For a sense of scale, φB is about 0.4V for normal doping levels and 6kBT/q = 0.16V at room temperature.) This places VT well into the exponential turn-on for ΨS > 2φB (positive exponent), where ns is significantly larger than NA and hence a “strong” channel is present. The definition of the “strong” inversion or “threshold” point is somewhat arbitrary, because it is the assignment of a discrete “turn-on” point to what is fundamentally an analog turn-on characteristic. For our purposes here, we will continue the discussion in terms of the most basic and straightforward definition of threshold voltage, ΨS = 2φB, but we will mention the alternate definition from time to time as well.

Page 192: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 25

EC

EV

EFS

Ei

EFM

M O S

qΨΨΨΨS -+

qVOX

VG = VOX + ΨΨΨΨS

qφB

MOS Capacitor (Ideal) - Band Diagram, Beyond Threshold

W = WT(maximum )

VG > VT ΨΨΨΨS > 2φφφφB

More electrons pile up at semiconductor surface (ns > NA)

WT

+QG

-Qn

-QD

M O S

+

- VG

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

P-type

B- B- B- B- B- B- B- W = WT(maximum)

MOS

B- B- B- B- B- B- B-

•••••••••••••••••••••••• ε, VG

−Ψ=

−Ψ=Tk

qNTk

qnnB

BSA

B

BSis

)2(exp)(exp φφ

Page 193: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 26

At threshold, the depletion region has reached its maximum width. Further increases in gate voltage are compensated by an increase in the electron concentration in the inversion layer as depicted in the charge diagram; any increase in W is negligibly small.

Additional gate charge beyond threshold is compensated by an increase in inversion layer charge, rather than depletion region expansion, because ns increases exponentially with ΨS for ΨS > 2φB (positive exponent), whereas the depletion region expands as √ΨS (see equation, next slide). Once a good channel forms, it effectively “shields” the depletion region below (i.e. the electric field lines emanating from the gate charge terminate on the channel charge and are not “felt” at the far edge of the depletion region). Hence, the inversion charge dominates the sub-gate dc electrostatics beyond threshold.

Summary:

Additional gate charge compensated by:

Surface carrier concentration

Surface PotentialApplied voltage

P-Type MOS Capacitor biased into:

additional inversion layer chargens ≥ NAΨS ≥ 2φB0 < VT ≤ VGStrong Inversion

additional depletion charge and additional inversion layer charge

ni ≤ ns < NAφB ≤ ΨS < 2φB0 < VG < VTInversion

additional depletion charge (expansion of depletion region)

ps < NAns < ni

0 < ΨS < φB0 < VG < VTDepletion

accumulation of holes (majority carriers) at surface

ps > NAΨS < 0VG < 0Accumulation

Page 194: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 27

MOS Capacitor - Useful Equations

SAqN

W S Ψ= ε2

=−=i

ABFi

nN

qTk

qEbulkE

B ln)(φ

SDqN

W S Ψ= ε2

−=−=i

DBFi

nN

qTk

qEbulkE

B ln)(φ

ΨS = 2φB

VG = VOX + ΨS

Depletion region width:

Bulk potential:

Definition of strong inversion (threshold):

MOS capacitor voltage drops (ideal):

P-type

N-type

( )B

A

ST

qNW φε 22= ( )B

D

ST

qNW φε 22=

Maximum depletion region width (occurs at threshold):

P-type N-type

P-type

N-type

(alternate definition: ΨS = 2φB + 6kBT/q)

These equations assume the MOS capacitor is in the extrinsic temperature region (e.g. around room temperature).

Page 195: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 28

Useful equations for the MOS capacitor.

Page 196: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 29

A Closer Look at the Surface Potential (Ideal)

OX

As

CqN'

2εγ =where:γγγγ is called the body factor - contains all thephysical attributes and constants

P-Type

for N-Typealso note:

SSGV Ψ−Ψ≈ γ

OX

Ds

CqN'

2εγ =

ΨΨΨΨS

VG0

2φB

2φB + 6kBT/q

φB VT(alternate def.)

depletion inversion(weak)

inversion(moderate/strong)

inversion(strong)

VT(our definition)

−Ψ+Ψ−Ψ=Tk

qqTkV

B

BB SSSG

)2(exp φγ

OX

OXOX

tC ε=' (gate capacitance

per unit area)

Page 197: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 30

It is desirable to minimize VOX and maximize ΨS , meaning that the gate voltage has maximum influence over the semiconductor surface. The importance of this will become more obvious when we discuss the MOSFET transistor in the next module.

Since surface potential can not be measured directly, it is useful to have an expression relating ΨS to the applied gate voltage VG. This is given above (for a detailed derivation, the reader is referred to Chapter 2 of Operation and Modeling of the MOS Transistor, Y.P. Tsividis, McGraw-Hill, 1987). The expression is plotted as ΨS vs. VG (although the equation can not be solved explicitly for ΨS ). For weak inversion, the steeper slope indicates that large changes inΨS are required to accommodate the gate charge from small changes in VG. In strong inversion, however, only slight changes in ΨS are required, because of the strong exponential response of the inversion charge to ΨS as discussed previously. (This graph also makes it clear why some authors prefer that threshold be defined as ΨS = 2φB + 6kBT/q, where the surface potential has saturated somewhat.)

Aside -- Looking Ahead: The weak-inversion slope is very important because it influences MOSFET parametrics. Optimal MOSFET performance is achieved by maximizing this slope, which corresponds to minimizing the body factor γ. As γ → 0, VG → ΨS, as if none of the gate voltage dropped across the oxide (VOX = 0). This gives the gate voltage maximum control over the semiconductor surface, resulting in a sharper on-off transition for the transistor and a lower threshold voltage, which translates into a higher drive current and hence faster circuits. Minimizing γ in turn means minimizing the gate oxide thickness tox and the substrate doping NA (this can be seen from the equation for γ above, and is discussed further in the next slides).

* Note on nomenclature: COX is used to represent the oxide capacitance, εOXA/tOX (in Farads). C’OX is used to denote oxide capacitance per unit area, εOX/tOX (e.g. Farads/µm2). This module and the next one will use these two quantities often.

Page 198: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 31

MOS Capacitor - Surface Potential & Gate Ox Thickness

ΨΨΨΨS

W0 y

Thinner Oxide

ΨΨΨΨS

W0 y

Thicker Oxide

VG = VOX + ΨΨΨΨS

MOS M O S

+VG +VG

Page 199: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 32

For a thinner gate oxide, there is less voltage drop across the oxide (lower VOX) and hence more voltage drop across the depletion region in the semiconductor surface (higher ψs). Therefore, the gate voltage has more control over the semiconductor surface, and strong inversion (threshold) will be achieved at a lower applied gate voltage; i.e. the threshold voltage VT will be lower. As previously mentioned, a lower threshold voltage is advantageous for a transistor (MOSFET), as it typically means that the transistor will produce a higher drive current, which in turn allows for faster transistor circuits.

Page 200: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 33

MOS Capacitor - Surface Potential & Doping

ΨΨΨΨS

W0 y

Lighter Doping

MOS

ΨΨΨΨS

W0 y

Heavier Doping

MOS

VG = VOX + ΨΨΨΨS

QG = -QD

QD = qANAW+VG +VG

Page 201: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 34

Lighter doping necessitates a wider depletion region (to uncover enough fixed ions to balance the gate charge). The depletion region can be thought of as an insulator (i.e. very few mobile charge carriers, very high resistance). VG must drop across the oxide (VOX) and the depletion region (ΨS). The wider the depletion region, the larger the voltage drop in the semiconductor, i.e. larger ΨS.

Page 202: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 35

MOS Capacitor (Ideal) - Threshold Voltage Calculation

Threshold Voltage

P-Type MOS Capacitor

OX

BAS

BT

CqN

V'

222

φεφ +=

N-Type MOS Capacitor

OX

BDS

BT

CqN

V'

222

φεφ −=

where

=i

BB

nn

qTk lnφwhere

OX

OXOX

tC ε=' (gate capacitance

per unit area)

OX

OXOX

tC ε=' (gate capacitance

per unit area)

=i

BB

np

qTk lnφ

p ≈ NA for extrinsic temperature region (e.g. room temp.)

n ≈ ND for extrinsic temperature region (e.g. room temp.)

Page 203: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 36

Threshold voltage expressions. Note that the threshold voltage is smaller (in magnitude) for thinner gate oxide and/or lighter silicon doping, as previously discussed.

Temperature Dependence of VT: The temperature dependence of VT comes from φB. As the temperature increases, φB decreasesdue to the fact that p → ni. Recall that the P-type substrate/well will approach intrinsic behavior at higher temperatures, i.e. p → ni(as discussed in module 1), so φB → 0 (i.e. EF → Ei), so VT → 0. Thus, threshold voltage decreases with increasing temperature.

Page 204: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 37

MOS Capacitor (Ideal) - AC Behavior & The C-V Curve

dVdQC =

VG

P-type

MOS

The C-V Test: A

~

VG

time

slow dc ramplow-frequency ac signal

VG

time

slow dc ramphigh- frequency ac signal

0 0

High-Frequency TestLow-Frequency Test

Page 205: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 38

Capacitance is a measure of how effectively a capacitor handles charge. In dc terms, it is the proportionality constant between the voltage applied across the capacitor and the amount of charge stored, Q = C V (i.e. a device with a higher capacitance stores more charge for a given applied voltage). For ac voltage signals, it is better thought of as a measure of how the charge on the capacitor changes in response to changes in the applied voltage, C = dQ/dV (a device with a high capacitance exhibits a large change in Qfor a small change in V, and thus is very responsive to changes in the applied voltage).

The capacitance-voltage characteristic of the capacitor is measured using the C-V test described here. A small-amplitude ac signal is superimposed on a slow dc ramp of the gate voltage. The transient currents in the circuit are measured, and used to calculate the charge (i = dQ/dt), which is then used to calculate the capacitance as a function of the applied voltage VG.

We will consider two cases, a low-frequency ac signal vs. a high-frequency signal. We will see that the frequency of the signal does not affect the C-V of the device in accumulation or depletion, but has a pronounced effect on its inversion behavior.

Aside – Technical Note: The slow dc ramp makes this a “quasi-static” test, allowing the device to maintain thermal equilibrium as it is being tested. The idea here is to increment the dc gate voltage a small amount, then use the ac signal and measure the transient currents to calculate the capacitance, then increment again to the next dc gate voltage point. Repeating this over the dc voltage range of interest, with slow and gradual increases in the dc voltage, generates the “quasi-static” C-V curve.)

Page 206: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 39

MOS Capacitor (Ideal) - The C-V Characteristic

C

VGVT0

OX

OXOX

tACC

ε=≈OX

OXOX

tACC ε=≈

Accumulation

Depletion

Inversion

low frequency

high frequency

P-Type Si

OXS

OX

OX

SOX

SOX

tW

CCC

CCC

εε+

=+

=1

COX

COX

CS

COX

OXS

TOX

OX

SOX

SOX

tW

CCC

CCC

εε+

=+

=1 COX

CS(min)

VA

VOX, COX

ΨS, CS

tOX

W

+QG

-QG

+QS

-QSW

AC SS

ε=

OX

OXOX

tAC ε=+

-

equivalentcircuit

Page 207: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 40

The Key to Understanding the C-V Behavior: Majority Carriers Respond Fast, Minority Carriers Respond Slow!

Majority carrier relaxation time (aka. dielectric relaxation time): How quickly the majority carriers can respond to a non-equilibrium condition and restore equilibrium, typically 10-10 - 10-13 sec. For example, if we moved all the holes in a P-type semiconductor to one side of the substrate, the time it takes for them to redistribute to an equilibrium condition is the relaxation time.

Minority carrier lifetime (ττττ): As discussed in module 1, this is the mean time that minority carriers will exist before recombining, typically on the order of 0.01 to 0.1 sec (note: orders of magnitude slower than the majority carrier relaxation time!). Since the recombination rate equals the generation rate at thermal equilibrium, this is also the mean time between generation events. Essentially, it is the time associated with R-G of minority carriers.

Qualitative Description of the C-V Characteristic

Accumulation: A change in gate charge is compensated by adding/removing holes at the semiconductor surface. This is similar to an ordinary parallel-plate capacitor, with charge fluctuating on either side of the oxide dielectric layer. Thus it has a capacitance COX = εOXA/tOX . This is true at both low and high frequencies, because the charge compensation is performed by the movement of holes (majority carriers), and their response (relaxation) time is more than sufficient to keep up with the fluctuations even if they are very rapid.

Depletion: A change in gate charge is compensated by a change in the width (depth) of the depletion region. In other words, an increase in gate charge causes holes to retreat from the edge of the depletion region, thus uncovering more B- depletion charge. A reduction in gate charge causes holes to encroach into the edge of the depletion region, re-covering some B- charge. Hence, the depletion region fluctuates about its dc value (W) in response to the applied ac signal. This is analogous to a fluctuating charge on the two sides of a double-layer insulator, i.e. COX and CS in series*. As VG → VT, W → WT (max. value) so CS declines to its minimum value and so does the overall capacitance C. This is true at both low and high frequencies, because the charge compensation is performed by the movement of holes (majority carriers), and their response (relaxation) time is more than sufficient to keep up with the fluctuations even if they are very rapid.

Inversion. Low Frequency (f < 100 Hz): Changes in gate charge are compensated by changes in inversion charge. These changes in inversion charge come about via R-G. In other words, as the gate charge increases, thermal generation increases near the surface of the depletion region to supply more electrons to the inversion layer. As the gate charge decreases, recombination increases to reduce the inversion charge. Because the frequency is low, R-G can keep up. Once again, charge is fluctuating on either side of the gate oxide, i.e. like an ordinary parallel-plate capacitor with a capacitance COX = εOXA/tOX . High Frequency: The relatively slow R-G process is not able to supply/eliminate minority carriers fast enough to provide inversion-charge compensation for the ac signal. The number of carriers in the inversion layer remains fixed, and changes in gate charge are balanced by the much faster majority carrier response instead – i.e. the depletion region fluctuating about its dc value WT as holes move at the edge of the depletion region. Per the discussion above, this is like having COX and CS in series, but W = WT (max. value) so CS is at a constant, minimum value.

* The depletion region can be treated like an insulator/dielectric since it contains (almost) no mobile charge carriers and hence is very non-conductive, like an insulator. If we make the simplifying assumption that all of the B- depletion charge is located in a sheet at the edge of the depletion region, we can treat the depletion region like a parallel-plate capacitor with a dielectric of thickness Wand hence a capacitance of CS = εSA/W. (This is the same approach we took in module 2 to calculate the capacitance of a PN junction. This simple parallel-plate model is only a rough approximation of the capacitance; more sophisticated models do exist and take into account the actual charge distribution in the depletion region as well as fringing capacitance, etc.)

Page 208: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 41

MOS Capacitor - Qualitative Description of the C-V (cont.)(a)

accumulation(b)

depletion

(c)inversion

(low-frequency)

(d)inversion

(high-frequency)

-QG

+Qp

M O S

∆QG

∆QP

W+QG

-QD

∆QG

∆QD

WT

+QG

-Qn

-QD

∆QG

∆Qn

WT

+QG

-Qn

-QD

∆QG

∆QD

CO

X

CO

X

CS(

min

)

CO

X

CO

X

CS

Page 209: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 42

This diagram shows the charge fluctuations in response to the applied ac signal, to reinforce the concepts discussed in the previous slide.

Diagram (a) shows how the charge is modulated in response to the applied ac voltage when the MOS capacitor is dc biased into accumulation. Changes in the gate charge (∆QG) are compensated by changes in the accumulation charge (∆QP) at the semiconductor surface. The device behaves like a common parallel-plate capacitor. The holes (majority carriers) can move fast enough to keep up with even a high-frequency ac signal.

Diagram (b) shows how charge is modulated when the MOS capacitor is dc biased into depletion. Fluctuations in gate charge are compensated by the depletion region fluctuating about its dc width (i.e. holes cover/uncover B- depletion charge as needed). The device behaves like two parallel-plate capacitors in series, with the gate oxide as one dielectric region and the depletion region as the other. Again, it is holes (majority carriers) which move in response to the gate charge fluctuations, and they are fast enough to keep up with even a high-frequency signal.

Diagram (c) shows how charge is balanced when the MOS capacitor is dc biased into inversion and the applied ac voltage is at a low frequency. Changes in gate charge are compensated by changes in the inversion charge (via R-G of minority carriers). The minority carrier R-G response is slow (compared to the majority carrier response), but if the ac signal is slow enough the device will balance charge via this mechanism. This gives rise to charge fluctuating on either side of the gate oxide, like an ordinary parallel-plate capacitor.

Diagram (d) shows the capacitor dc biased into inversion, but with a high-frequency ac signal. Fluctuation in gate charge is compensated not by inversion charge (the minority carrier response is much too slow) but rather by the depletion region fluctuating about its dc value (i.e. by majority carrier movement near the edge of the depletion region). The device once againbehaves like two parallel-plate capacitors in series. However, we know that the depletion region is at its maximum width (WT) in inversion (VG ≥ VT), and is therefore at its minimum capacitance (CS = εSA/WT). The capacitance of the gate oxide is constant (COX = εOXA/tOX), and these two capacitances combine to yield a minimum, constant capacitance for the device, as shown on the C-V curve.

Page 210: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 43

EC

EV

EFS

Ei

EFM

EC

EV

EVAC

Real MOS Capacitor - Band Diagram, Isolated Materials

M O S

For a real (non-ideal) MOS capacitor, φφφφM < φφφφS

qφM

qφS

EG(SiO2) ≈ 9 eV

EG(Si) = 1.1eV

(aluminum)

Page 211: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 44

Let us consider a real (non-ideal) MOS capacitor, where the work functions are not equal.

We will consider an aluminum gate for example, as historically this is the most common choice (we will consider poly-Si gates in the next module).

For an aluminum gate over a silicon substrate, φM < φS. This is generally true regardless of whether P-type or N-type silicon is used as the substrate. The value of φS depends on the position of the Fermi level EFS, which of course depends on the doping (type and concentration). We will continue to use P-type silicon for illustration; the N-type MOS capacitor will be summarized at the end.

Page 212: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 45

EC

EV

EFS

Ei

EFM

M O SW

Vbi

qφB

Real MOS Capacitor - Band Diagram, Equilibrium+ + + + + + +

P-type

B- B- B- B- B- B- B-W

ΦΦΦΦMS ≡≡≡≡ φφφφM - φφφφS

Vbi = - ΦΦΦΦMS (built-in voltage)

ΨS = ΦMS

EG(Si)

Vbiequilibrium

(no applied voltage)

(aluminum)

source: Solid State Electronic Devices, B.G. Streetman, Prentice Hall, 1990.

Page 213: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 46

Because φM < φS, the bands bend as shown above when the Fermi levels align* at equilibrium (no applied voltage).

The quantity ΦMS (≡ φM - φS) is the work function mismatch. Because φM < φS for an aluminum gate over silicon, ΦMS is a negative number. This is generally true for both N-type and P-type Si, as shown on the graph above (ΦMS vs. doping concentration).

As indicated by the band bending, the device has a built-in voltage Vbi equal to -ΦMS. The device is in depletion at equilibrium as depicted on the band diagram (i.e. ΨS = ΦMS).

* Electrons can not flow through the oxide (an insulator) to facilitate this equilibration. So to visualize how this works, imagine connecting a wire between the gate and substrate while they are isolated, and then assembling the MOS structure. Electrons will flow through the wire and the band diagrams will slide vertically wrt. one another until the Fermi levels have aligned (equilibrium). In practice, if electrical contact is made to the MOS capacitor, there is always some “back door” path like this by which equilibration can take place (e.g. through a power supply or battery).

Page 214: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 47

EC

EV

EFS

Ei

EFM

Real MOS Capacitor - Band Diagram, Flatband

+

-VFB

P-type

MOS

VFB

VFB

VFB = -Vbi = ΦΦΦΦMS

VG = VOX + ΨΨΨΨS + VFB

VFB = Flatband Voltagefor an ideal MOS Capacitor, VFB = 0for an Al gate on Si, VFB < 0

Vbi

Vbi VFB

(aluminum)

Page 215: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 48

A voltage can be applied to the gate to compensate for the work function mismatch and “flatten” the bands; this voltage is called the flatband voltage, VFB. Applying a negative gate voltage VFB = -Vbi (= ΦMS) will attract holes to the semiconductor surface and reduce the depletion region to zero (W = 0, ΨS = 0), shifting the band diagram to the flat-band condition as shown above (zero net voltage across the capacitor).

Page 216: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 49

Real MOS Capacitor - Oxide Charge

OX

iMS

CQVFB −Φ= Qi = effective net oxide charge

COX = oxide capacitance = εOXA/tOXΦMS < 0 for Al gate over Si

Flatband voltage w/oxide charge included

If there is a non-negligible amount of oxide charge, the flatband voltage becomes:

source: Pierret & Neudeck (editors), Modular Series on Solid State Devices, vol. 1, Addison-Wesley Publishing, 1988.

Page 217: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 50

Another non-ideality is the presence of charge in the gate oxide.

There are four general categories of oxide charge:

• Mobile ionic charge: due to contaminants (e.g. Na+, K+, Li+), usually from the processing environment

• Oxide trapped charge: from plasma processing, or hot electron injection (in a transistor)

• Fixed oxide charge: due to unoxidized Si within ~20 Å of the Si-SiO2 interface

• Interface states (traps): due to dangling/incomplete bonds at the Si-SiO2 interface

These charges contribute to band-bending at equilibrium, and are taken into account in the flatband voltage. Historically, these charges (particularly the mobile ionic charge) inhibited the development of high-quality MOS devices because they were not well understood and were difficult to control. Modern manufacturing processes minimize the amount of oxide charge, enabling the mass production of high-quality, high-performance MOS devices.

Note that, for ΦMS < 0, positive oxide charge (Qi > 0) will push the P-type semiconductor surface further into depletion (i.e. will require more B- charge under the gate to compensate the positive charges in the oxide). Negative oxide charge will work against ΦMS, reducing the degree of depletion. Qi is almost always positive, for both P-type and N-type substrates (wells).

Page 218: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 51

Real MOS Capacitor - Surface Potential Revisited

Adding the flatband voltage into the previous (ideal) relationship:

VG = VFB + VOX + ΨS

recall:

N-Typeor:

P-TypeOX

As

CqN'

2εγ =

OX

Ds

CqN'

2εγ =OX

OXOX

tC ε='where:

−Ψ+Ψ−Ψ+=Tk

qqTkVV

B

BB SSSFBG

)2(exp φγ

Page 219: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 52

The flatband voltage, which accounts for the work function mismatch and any oxide charge, is added into our previous derivation of the relationship between the applied gate voltage and the surface potential.

Page 220: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 53

MOS Capacitor – Threshold Voltage Revisited

Threshold Voltage

P-Type MOS Capacitor

OX

BAS

BFBT

CqN

VV'

222

φεφ ++=

N-Type MOS Capacitor

OX

BDS

BFBT

CqN

VV'

222

φεφ −−=

where

=i

BB

nn

qTk lnφwhere

OX

OXOX

tC ε=' (gate capacitance

per unit area)

OX

OXOX

tC ε=' (gate capacitance

per unit area)

=i

BB

np

qTk lnφ

p ≈ NA for extrinsic temperature region (e.g. room temp.)

n ≈ ND for extrinsic temperature region (e.g. room temp.)

(VFB < 0 for Al gate on Si → Increases P-type VT in magnitude)

(VFB < 0 for Al gate on Si → Decreases N-type VT in magnitude)

Page 221: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 54

The flatband voltage must also be added to the ideal threshold voltage calculation.

Note from the foregoing discussion that, for an aluminum gate over P-type silicon (and reasonably low amounts of oxide charge) the flatband voltage is negative (i.e. negative potential on gate relative to substrate) and hence reduces the threshold voltage for a P-type MOS capacitor per the equation shown above. This makes sense: the capacitor is biased slightly into depletion at equilibrium, thus strong inversion (threshold) will be achieved at a lower applied voltage.

(VFB is generally negative for an aluminum gate over N-type silicon as well, and will serve to increase VT in magnitude in that case.)

Page 222: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 55

Real MOS Capacitor - C-V Characteristic Revisited

C

VGVT0

Accumulation

Depletion

Inversion

low frequency

high frequency

P-Type Si

VFB

ideal

real

VT(ideal)

OX

OX

tAε

Page 223: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 56

The MOS capacitor is slightly in depletion at equilibrium, and hence the whole C-V curve is shifted to the left by an amount equal to the flatband voltage.

As previously noted, the threshold voltage of a P-type MOS capacitor will be reduced (vs. the ideal case), because the capacitor is already biased into depletion at equilibrium.

Page 224: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 57

MOS Capacitor - N-Type Si at a Glance

VG = 0

VG > 0

+ + + + + + + +

• • • • • • • •

N-Type

N-Type

VG < 0, |VG| < |VT|

- - - - -

N-Type

P+P+ P+P+ P+

VG < 0, |VG| →→→→ |VT|

- - - - - - - - -

N-Type

VG < 0, |VG| = |VT|

- - - - - - - - - - - - -

N-Type

o o o o o o o o

o o o o

W

W

WT

Equilibrium (ideal)

Accumulation

Depletion

Inversion

Strong Inversion(Threshold)

Page 225: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 58

This is a summery of an (ideal) N-type MOS capacitor. It is analogous to P-type (note that the voltage polarities are reversed).

Page 226: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 59

MOS Capacitor - N-Type Si at a Glance (cont.)

ECEFSEi

EV

EFM

M O S (N-Type)

ECEFSEi

EV

EFM••••••••••W

ECEFSEi

EV

EFM ••••••••••W

o

ECEFSEi

EV

EFM ••••••••••WT

o o o o o

ECEFSEi

EV

EFM

•••••••••••••

Equilibrium (Ideal)VG = 0

AccumulationVG > 0

Depletion VG < 0, |VG| < |VT|

Inversion VG < 0, |VG| →→→→ |VT|

Strong Inversion (Threshold) VG < 0, |VG| = |VT|

o

o

o

o

VG = VOX + ΨSΨS < 2ϕB

ϕB

ϕB

ϕB

VG = VOX + ΨSΨS → 2ϕBps → ND

VG = VOX + ΨSΨS = 2ϕBps = ND

ΨS

o

+ -

- +

- +

- +

Page 227: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 60

This is a summary of the band diagrams for an (ideal) N-type MOS capacitor. It is analogous to P-type.

Also note that the equations provided in this module are written for both N-type and P-type MOS capacitors.

Page 228: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 61

0 VG

C

low frequency

high frequency

AccumulationDepletion

Inversion

VT

MOS Capacitor - N-Type Si at a Glance (cont.)

N-Type Si

OX

OX

tAε

Page 229: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOS Capacitor / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 3 - 62

The C-V curve for an (ideal) N-type MOS capacitor.

For a real (non-ideal) aluminum-gate N-type MOS capacitor, ΦMS < 0 and hence VFB < 0. The C-V curve shown above will be shifted to the left by an amount VFB (i.e. the device is in accumulation at equilibrium, and VT is increased in magnitude).

Page 230: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 1Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

4

The

MOSFET

Page 231: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 2Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

This is the fourth module in a five-module introduction to semiconductor devices. The modules are:

1. Electronic Properties of Silicon

2. The PN Junction

3. The MOS Capacitor

4. The MOSFET

5. Small Circuits

The transistor is the heart of modern electronic devices, allowing integrated circuits to perform logic functions and store information (memory). In this module, we will combine the concepts of the previous three modules to understand how transistors work.

Objectives of this module:

• Show that the MOSFET consists of two PN junctions (source and drain) separated by a MOS capacitor (gate)

• Identify the various layers and features of the MOSFET

• Understand the similarities and differences of N-channel vs. P-channel MOSFETs

• Understand MOSFET operation as a voltage-controlled switch

• Understand the different biasing regimes of the MOSFET – subthreshold, linear, saturation

• Understand the band diagram of the MOSFET in these biasing regimes

• Understand the I-V curve of a MOSFET

• Understand how the channel length and gate oxide thickness affect the performance of the transistor

• Understand how circuit speed is related to transistor drive current and RC delay

• Understand some short-channel effects and challenges associated with shrinking transistor dimensions

Looking Back: We are prepared to study the MOSFET because we understand the physics of the PN junction and the MOS capacitor from the previous modules.

Looking Ahead: At the end of this module we will understand how transistors work. In the next module, we will combine transistors together to build some basic logic and memory circuits.

Page 232: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 3Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

GateSource Drain

Top & Cross-Section View (Layered)

Source-to-DrainCross-Section

MOSFET - Layer/Feature IDMetal-Oxide-Semiconductor Field-Effect Transistor

Source:PN Junction

(Diode)

Gate: MOS Capacitor

Drain:PN Junction

(Diode)

P

•••

N+ N+

metal lines

contact / via

poly-Si gate

interlayerdielectric

(ILD)

substrate / well

source / drainregions

isolation

gate oxide

GateSource Drain•••

N+

Page 233: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 4Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET stands for Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor Field-Effect Transistor.

The MOSFET consists of a source, gate, and drain. Current flows from the source to the drain under the influence of the gate voltage. (Note that the MOSFET structure is symmetrical; i.e. which end is the “source” and which is the “drain” is determined by the applied voltages, which will be discussed shortly. The side that carriers flow out of is called the source, and the side they flow into is the drain.)

The source and drain regions in the semiconductor are PN junctions. The gate region is a MOS capacitor. We will combine our knowledge of these to understand the physics of the MOSFET.

Other features of the structure include the metal lines (typically aluminum or copper), which carry signals among transistors to form the circuit, and the interlayer dielectric or ILD (typically SiO2) which isolates the metal lines from one another and from the silicon substrate. In modern integrated circuits there are typically several layers of metal, separated by layers of ILD for isolation, and vertical connections are made between metal layers by vias (typically tungsten or copper). Also note the isolation oxide, which electrically isolates neighboring transistors.

In our discussion of the MOS capacitor, we used a metal gate. Early MOSFETs were fabricated with aluminum gates, however, modern transistors use a heavily (degenerately) doped poly-silicon* gate. The poly-Si gate has certain processing advantages (e.g. can withstand higher processing temperatures than aluminum and has certain patterning advantages). The poly-Si gate is doped simultaneously with the source and drain regions in a self-aligned gate process, which helps to optimize the alignment of the gate to the source/drain regions. More on poly-Si gates later.

* The term “poly-silicon” is short for “poly-crystalline silicon”. Poly-Si does not have a perfect crystal structure like single-crystal silicon. On a molecular level, poly-Si consists of “grains” - within a grain the silicon has the single-crystal structure, but the crystal orientation is not preserved across grain boundaries.

Note: Enhancement-mode (“normally off”) MOSFETs are discussed here, as they are the predominant choice for modern IC production. Depletion-mode (“normally on”) transistors are not discussed.

Page 234: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 5Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Two Types

N-Channel Transistor P-Channel Transistor

source drain

gate

source drain

gate

P

•••source gate drain

N+ N+

N

•••source gate drain

P+ P+

circuitsymbol

device structure

N+ P+

Page 235: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 6Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

There are two types of MOSFET, N-channel and P-channel (the term “channel” will be explained shortly). The device structure is the same, only the doping differs, as shown.

Page 236: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 7Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Part 1 – Large Geometry MOSFET

Page 237: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 8Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

We will divide our study of the MOSFET into two parts. First, we will study the large-geometry MOSFET. In Part 2, we will extend this study to small-geometry (short-channel) MOSFETs.

Page 238: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 9Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

P

•••

The Basics - Turning the MOSFET On & Off

MOSFET at Equilibrium(no applied voltages)

source gate drain

backside/well

N+ N+

depletion region

Page 239: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 10Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

The MOSFET is actually a four-terminal device, when the backside contact is considered (this may also be referred to as the body, substrate, tub, or well contact or “tap”).

We will use the N-channel MOSFET for example. The operation of the P-channel transistor is analogous, and will be summarized later.

The N-channel transistor is shown here at equilibrium, i.e. no applied voltages. Note the depletion regions formed by the source and drain PN junctions. If the width of these depletion regions is negligibly small relative to the gate length and width, the transistor is considered a large-geometry MOSFET. We will study the physics of large-geometry MOSFETs first, and then extend this to small-geometry MOSFETs in Part 2.

The MOSFET behaves like a microscopic electrical switch in digital applications, and we will start by understanding how to turn it on and off. (In analog applications the MOSFET behaves like a microscopic amplifier. The focus of this course is digital applications, but the concepts can be applied to analog applications as well.)

Page 240: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 11Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

P

••VGS < VT

SubthresholdMOSFET is “OFF”

+VDS

The Basics - Turning the MOSFET On & Off (cont.)

N+ N+

reverse-biased PN junction:depletion region widens, only leakage current

P

••VGS = 0 +VDS

N+ N+

No Applied Gate VoltageMOSFET is “OFF”

N+

MOS capacitor is biased into depletion, only leakage current

Page 241: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 12Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

For normal operation, the source and backside are grounded, and a positive drain-to-source voltage VDS is applied. With VGS = 0 (the gate-to-source voltage), the device is considered to be OFF. Note that the source PN junction is zero-biased and the drain PN junction is reverse biased, so there is only a small leakage current in the device.

For VGS << VT, the MOS capacitor is biased in depletion. As VGS approaches VT surface inversion begins, but is not sufficient to turn the device on (see next page). The transistor is still considered to be OFF (only a tiny drain current due to junction leakage and subthreshold current). Note that the voltage under the gate increases from source to drain due to the presence of VDS, hence so does the depletion layer width W.

Page 242: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 13Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

VGS ≥≥≥≥ VT ID

P

••At or Beyond Threshold

MOSFET is “ON”

+VDS

N+

Note: The depth of the channel is exaggerated for illustration purposes in this diagram. It is actually more like a “sheet” of charge right under the gate oxide.

The Basics - Turning the MOSFET On & Off (cont.)

N+

ID

•••••••••••••••••

Page 243: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 14Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

When VGS = VT (threshold voltage), strong inversion occurs in the MOS capacitor, forming an inversion layer or channel of electrons underneath the gate oxide. This channel shorts the source and drain regions, forming a conductive path. Once this channel is formed, electrons flow from source to drain under the influence of VDS, giving rise to the drain current ID. The transistor is ON.

The MOSFET behaves like a microscopic, voltage-controlled switch. The gate voltage determines whether the switch is open (no current) or closed (current).

Note that the channel is formed by the gate voltage (vertical electric field). This is where the term Field Effect Transistor (FET) comes from.

* In the diagram above, the drain current ID is shown flowing in the direction of conventional current. Conventional current, by definition, flows from the positive terminal to the negative terminal (in this case, ground) and hence is always opposite to thedirection of electron flow. As noted in module 1, the slides in this course show currents in the direction of conventional current flow unless otherwise specified.

Page 244: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 15Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

VDS

ID

0

constant VGS

Linear Saturation

VDS(SAT)

MOSFET - I-V Characteristic

constant VGS > VT ID

P

••

ramp VDS

N+

For a constant gate voltage (above threshold), ramp VDSand measure ID.

ID(SAT)

N+•••••••••••••••••

Page 245: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 16Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

The graph above is the DC current-voltage (I-V) characteristic of the MOSFET. It shows the drain current vs. source-to-drain voltage for a constant gate voltage. For VDS < VDS(SAT), ID increases linearly with VDS (ohmic behavior). Near VDS(SAT), the current begins to saturate. Beyond VDS(SAT), the current is constant (saturated) and does not increase with VDS. VDS(SAT) is called the saturation voltage. ID(SAT) is the saturation current, aka. drive current.

We will discuss the physics behind this I-V characteristic in detail.

Page 246: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 17Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Band Diagram

EC

EF

EV

W

qVbi

P

•••

source gate drain

backside/well

N+ N+

W

P

••VGS = 0 +VDS

N+ N+

EC

EF

EV

W

qVbi

W

qVDS

Equilibrium Applied Drain Voltage

reversebiaseddrain

•••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

oooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo

Page 247: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 18Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

The source and drain regions form two back-to-back PN junctions, hence the band diagrams shown here. (These should look familiar - see the exercise at the end of the PN Junction module.)

Page 248: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 19Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Subthreshold

P

••VGS

0 →→→→ VTVDS

N+

EC

EF

EV

W

q(Vbi-ΨS)

W

ooooooooooooooo

••••••••••••••

••••••••••••••

++

smallID

N+

leakage

e-Gate MOS capacitor is biased into depletion

from previous band diagram, for reference

Page 249: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 20Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

The source barrier height is reduced a small amount by the surface potential (ΨS), slightly forward biasing the source diode. There is not enough gate voltage to produce a good channel (VGS < VT), but some electrons are present in the region underneath the gate, and a small amount of subthreshold current (aka. leakage current) does flow from source to drain under the influence of VDS.

Increasing VGS increases ΨS, further reducing the barrier height and increasing the subthreshold drain current IDS.

The transistor is still considered OFF (but leaky) in this subthreshold regime. The threshold voltage VT represents the OFF-to-ON transition point in gate voltage.

Subthreshold leakage current is undesirable in a MOSFET – it leads to increased static power consumption and may contribute to other non-idealities such as noise or latchup. A well-designed transistor will have low leakage and an abrupt turn-on transition at VT.

Remember that the subthreshold characteristics of the MOSFET are dominated by the source diode.

Page 250: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 21Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Subthreshold (cont.)

+≈

==

OX

DB

D

GS

D

GS

CC

qTkS

IddV

IddVS

1)10ln(

)(ln)10ln(

)(log 10

N+ N+

•+VDSµeff

effective/surface mobility illustrated

Subthreshold Swing:

electron

+VGS•

Page 251: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 22Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

This graph shows the drain current vs. applied gate voltage (with some nominal drain voltage applied). Ramping the gate voltagecauses a progressively stronger channel to form underneath the gate, and the drain current increases exponentially (notice the log scale).

Observe, however, that the trend begins to flatten out at higher gate voltage. Although more electrons are being pulled into the channel, the effective mobility (aka. surface mobility) decreases, and the drain current begins to level off. Effective/surface mobility, µeff, is generally lower than the mobility in the semiconductor bulk. Surface mobility is depicted in the diagram above –the carrier undergoes scattering events with the oxide interface due to the presence of the vertical electric field (gate voltage) as it traverses the channel. As the gate voltage is increased, more scattering takes place, and the effective/surface mobility is reduced.

The gate swing voltage (aka. subthreshold swing), S, is an important parameter for understanding the OFF-to-ON transition of a transistor. It is the change in gate voltage required to cause a decade (power of ten) increase in the drain current. In the case shown here, S = 50 mV.

A small swing voltage is desirable. As S → 0, the transistor approaches the behavior of an ideal switch, which turns on abruptly in a “step function” manner. As S increases, a “softer” (more gradual) turn-on is observed. As S → ∞, it becomes impossible to turn the transistor on and off at all.

Note that the swing voltage is sensitive to the ratio CD/COX. Since CD = εsA/W and COX = εOXA/tOX, the swing voltage is sensitive to the ratio tOX / W – i.e. the relative thickness of the gate oxide and the depletion region. Recalling our discussion of the MOS capacitor, the gate voltage drops across the oxide and the depletion region (VGS = VOX + ψS). For the gate voltage to have maximum influence over the semiconductor surface, we desire minimum voltage drop across the oxide and maximum voltage drop in the semiconductor (depletion region). As previously discussed, the way to accomplish is to: (1) reduce tOX by using a thinner gate oxide; and/or (2) increase W by reducing the dopant concentration NA underneath the gate. These result in a lower body factor γ (i.e. ΨS increases steeply with VG), a lower subthreshold swing (S) (i.e. ID increases steeply with VG), and a lower threshold voltage VT (i.e. a strong channel is present at a lower VG) – all this sums up to a better transistor.

Page 252: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 23Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Linear Regime

P

••VGS ≥≥≥≥ VT

VDS < VDS(SAT)

N+

EC

EF

EVooooooooooooooo

••••••••••••••

••••••••••••••

++ ID

N+

hole currentnegligible

N-type channel, behaves like a resistor (ohmic)

ID

from previous band diagram, for reference

Page 253: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 24Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

When the gate voltage exceeds the threshold voltage (VGS ≥ VT), the transistor turns ON. The source barrier height is reduced to near zero by the surface potential (ΨS), and the source diode is strongly forward biased. Electrons flow out of the source (diffusion current) forming the channel. Electrons flow to the drain under the influence of VDS.

Increasing VGS (for a constant VDS) increases ΨS, sucking more electrons into the channel from the source, hence increasing the drain current ID. As discussed previously, there is a limit to this: although the channel carrier concentration increases, the effective/surface mobility decreases.

Increasing VDS (for constant VGS) increases the source-to-drain potential, linearly increasing ID - the transistor is in the linear region of operation and the ID-VDS characteristic is ohmic. The channel is behaving like a simple resistor (as indicated by the band diagram).

Remember that the behavior of the MOSFET in the linear regime is dominated by the Gate (MOS) capacitor.

Question: This band diagram is taken at a cross-section just under the gate oxide (through the channel). What does the band diagram look like deeper into the substrate, e.g. through a cross-section near the bottom of the source/drain regions, out in the P-type bulk, etc? (See next slide ...)

Inversion Charge - MOS Capacitor vs. MOSFET: In our discussion of the MOS capacitor, the inversion charge came from minority carrier generation near the semiconductor surface. In the MOSFET, however, the inversion charge comes mainly from the source via source barrier lowering (i.e. forward biasing the source junction). Electrons diffuse from the source into the region under the gate to form the channel. Therefore, the MOSFET has a much better supply of electrons for the inversion layer (channel) than the MOS capacitor. In other words, the inversion layer in the MOS capacitor is electrically isolated from the outside world –thermal generation is its only source of electrons. The MOSFET inversion layer (channel) is electrically connected to the outside world (power supply) through the source and drain. More on this later.

Page 254: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 25Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - 3-D Band Diagram

x

y

L

source: S.M. Sze, Physics of Semiconductor Devices, John Wiley & Sons, 1981.

Page 255: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 26Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

These are 3-D band diagrams for the MOSFET. They show the combined influence of the gate and drain voltages, and at various depths into the substrate.

Diagram (a) shows the orientation of the structure, with the gate facing out of the page. Diagram (b) shows the bands at equilibrium. Diagram (c) shows an applied gate voltage but no drain voltage. Diagram (d) shows applied gate and drain voltages. By observing the energy gradients on these diagrams, it is easy to see how electrons will “roll downhill” to the gate region (channel formation, under the influence of VGS) and then “roll downhill” from source to drain (conduction, under the influence of VDS).

Page 256: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 27Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Linear Into Saturation

P

••VGS ≥≥≥≥ VT

VDS = VDS(SAT)ID = ID(SAT)

N+

EC

EF

EV

••••••••••••••

••••••••••••••

P

••VGS ≥≥≥≥ VT

VDS →→→→ VDS(SAT)ID →→→→ ID(SAT)

N+ N+

EC

EF

EV

••••••••••••••

••••••••••••••

At VDS = VDS(SAT), the channel is pinched offat the drain edge

+ ++ +

N+

ID ID(SAT)

Page 257: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 28Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Increasing VDS widens the depletion region at the drain end of the channel. The depletion region encroaches on the channel near the drain, starting to “pinch off” the channel. At VDS = VDS(SAT), the channel is pinched off at the drain edge.

Page 258: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 29Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Saturation

VDS(SAT) ≈≈≈≈ VGS - VT

P

••VGS ≥≥≥≥ VT

VDS > VDS(SAT)ID = ID(SAT)

N+

++

N+

∆∆∆∆L

EC

EF

EV

•••••••••••••• ID(SAT)

••••••••••••••

No longer behaving like a simpleresistor. Now looks like a depletion region being fed by the channel.

Page 259: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 30Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

For VDS > VDS(SAT), the pinch-off point pulls back from the drain. ∆L = 0 at VDS = VDS(SAT). As VDS is increased beyond VDS(SAT), ∆L becomes larger.

VGS -VT is a useful approximation of the saturation voltage, VDS(SAT). At the source end of the channel, the whole gate voltage is effective in inverting the surface (because the source is grounded, hence the voltage drop at the source end of the channel is always simply VGS). At the drain end of the channel, however, only the difference between the gate and drain voltages is effective (VGS –VDS). When the drain voltage equals VGS – VT, it follows that the voltage drop across the drain end of the channel is just VT, and hence the channel (inversion) charge falls to zero at the drain end – i.e. pinch-off occurs and saturation begins. In other words, when VDS ≥ VGS – VT , then VGD ≤ VT (VGD is the gate-to-drain voltage), and the channel is pinched off at the drain end.

Note that the subgate region is no longer behaving like a simple resistor. It now looks more like a reverse-biased junction being fed by the channel. The next slide will explain this in more detail.

Page 260: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 31Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Saturation (cont.)

VA

I

Forward Bias (On)

Reverse Bias(Off / Leakage)

I0

0

VDS

ID

0

constant VGS

Linear Saturation

VDS(SAT)

ID(SAT)

P N+W

VA

+-

I0

•••

electrons (minority carriers)

P

N+∆∆∆∆L

•••••••••••••••••••••••••electronchannel

drain

P

ID(SAT) •+

substrate/well

Reverse-BiasedPN Junction Diode MOSFET in

Saturation

VDS > VDS(SAT)

Page 261: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 32Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Why does the drain current saturate?

A parallel exists between the reverse saturation current (I0) of a PN junction diode and the saturation current of a MOSFET. In both cases, the current is constant with respect to applied voltage because the current through the depletion region is supply limited.

In the case of a reverse-biased PN junction, the carriers are supplied by minority carrier generation in the quasi-neutral region. These carriers are swept across the depletion region by the applied voltage (VA). The current (I0) is very small because there are few carriers available. Increasing VA does not increase the supply of carriers (only their kinetic energy as they traverse the depletion region), therefore I0 is supply limited and constant wrt. VA.

For the MOSFET in saturation, the carriers are supplied by the channel (inversion layer). The electrons in the channel get swept across the depletion region (∆L) by the applied drain voltage (VDS). Increasing VDS does not increase the supply of carriers (only their kinetic energy as they traverse the depletion region), therefore ID(SAT) is supply limited and constant wrt. VDS.

The key difference is that the channel is a much better supplier of carriers than the minority carrier generation in a PN junction diode, so ID(SAT) is a much larger current (~mA) than I0 (~pA).

Remember that the behavior of the MOSFET in saturation is dominated by the drain diode.

Page 262: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 33Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Saturation Analogy

source

water outwater in

channel

drain

source water out

water in

channel

drain

Linear

Saturation

ID

ID(SAT)

Page 263: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 34Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

An analogy to illustrate saturation.

The top drawing shows a canal which is analogous to the MOSFET in its linear regime. The water droplets represent electrons andthe water current represents the the flow of electrons. The height of the hill represents VDS. By lowering the drain end (i.e. increasing VDS) the hill becomes steeper and the current increases.

The bottom drawing depicts saturation. The drain becomes discontinuous with the channel (representing the pinch-off and pull-back of the channel). There is a waterfall at the drain edge (analogous to the reverse-biased drain junction). Lowering the drain end represents making VDS > VDS(SAT). The current is supply limited, and lowering the drain end does not increase the current flow.

Note that in either case, increasing the gate voltage is analogous to making the water deeper – it will increase the current.

Page 264: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 35Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - I-V Characteristic, Revisited

VDS

ID

0

VGS = +3 V

VGS = +2 V

VGS = +1 V

VDS(SAT) = VGS - VT

LinearSaturation

aside

Page 265: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 36Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

The I-V characteristic is shown for several gate voltages. Note that the drain current increases with increasing gate voltage, as expected, but the basic shape of the ID-VDS curve remains the same.

Aside: Note that the plot has been extended to show VDS < 0. In this case, the drain junction becomes forward-biased and starts to behave like a diode. The typical diode I-V characteristic is observed for VGS = 0 (gate grounded). For VGS > 0 the gate voltage increases the magnitude of the drain forward-bias somewhat (try to visualize this on the band diagram), giving rise to the curves shown to the right of the true diode curve. The MOSFET is not usually operated this way -- normal operation requires that the drain be reverse-biased per the forgoing discussion. This is mentioned as an aside for completeness, because it is possible for some transistors (particularly in analog circuits) to enter this region of operation under certain conditions.

Page 266: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 37Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Useful EquationsThreshold Voltage

N-Channel MOSFET

OX

BAS

BFBT

CqN

VV'

222

φεφ ++=

P-Channel MOSFET

OX

BDS

BFBT

CqN

VV'

222

φεφ −−=

=i

BB

np

qTk lnφwhere

=i

BB

nn

qTk lnφwhere

OX

OXOX

tC ε=' (gate capacitance

per unit area)

OX

OXOX

tC ε=' (gate capacitance

per unit area)

p ≈ NA for extrinsic temperature region (e.g. room temp.)

n ≈ ND for extrinsic temperature region (e.g. room temp.)

Page 267: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 38Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Recall these threshold voltage expressions from the MOS capacitor module. They can be used to approximate the threshold voltage of an ideal (large geometry) MOSFET. Keep in mind, however, that the MOSFET inversion charge comes from the source rather than from thermally-generated minority carriers in the substrate/well, so this is only an approximation.

Page 268: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 39Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Aside: Work Function Mismatch for Poly-Si Gate

source: S.M. Sze, Physics of Semiconductor Devices, John Wiley & Sons, 1981.

Al-gate N-channel transistor

Al-gate P-channel transistor

Poly-Si gate N-channel transistor

Poly-Si gate P-channel transistor

substrate/well doping concentration

Page 269: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 40Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

As previously discussed, modern MOSFETs are fabricated with poly-silicon gates instead of metal (aluminum) gates. The poly-Si gate is heavily (degenerately) doped, like the source/drain regions.

This graph shows experimentally-determined values of the gate-to-substrate workfunction difference ΦMS (≡ φM - φS) for various gate materials (aluminum, N+ poly-Si, P+ poly-Si, and gold) over N-type and P-type Si. (ΦMS can be determined experimentally by comparing the relative shifts in the C-V curves for these various capacitors when fabricated on the same oxidized silicon substrate.)

Notice that the aluminum-gate capacitors have a negative value of ΦMS (i.e. φM < φS) and hence VFB (flatband voltage) for both N-type and P-type substrates (wells), as discussed in module 3.

A modern N-channel transistor typically consists of an N+ poly-Si gate over a P-type substrate/well. The Fermi level in the N+ poly-Si is essentially at the conduction band edge, and the Fermi level in the P-type substrate is below mid-gap. Therefore, the gate has a smaller work function (as measured between EF and EVAC) than the substrate, and ΦMS (and hence VFB) is negative, as was the case for an aluminum gate. This means the MOSFET is in depletion at equilibrium (no applied gate voltage), and VT is lowered by an amount ΦMS = VFB (ignoring oxide charge). As the substrate doping is increased, EF moves down further from mid-gap, and ΦMS increases in magnitude, as shown on the graph.

A modern P-channel transistor consists of a P+ poly-Si gate over an N-type substrate/well. The Fermi level in the P+ poly-Si gate is essentially at the valence band edge, and the Fermi level in the N-type substrate is above mid-gap. Therefore, the gate has a larger work function than the substrate, and ΦMS (and hence VFB) is positive, as shown on the graph. This means the MOSFET is in depletion at equilibrium, and VT is less in magnitude by an amount ΦMS = VFB(ignoring oxide charge). As the substrate doping is increased, EF moves up further from mid-gap, and ΦMS increases.

Notice that the N-channel and P-channel transistor ΦMS values are more closely matched to each other in magnitude when the transistors are fabricated using poly-Si gates instead of Al gates. In other words, the two types of transistors are more similar to each other in terms of flatband voltage (magnitude) and threshold voltage shift (i.e. both VTN and VTP are shifted down in magnitude by about the same amount). This can be an advantage in circuits which use both types of transistors together (i.e. CMOS circuits, discussed in module 5).

Page 270: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 41Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

( )TGS VVLCZSATI OXeff

D −=2

2')( µ

MOSFET - Useful Equations (cont.)

( ) DSDS VVVV

LCZI TGS

OXeffD

−−=2

for VGS ≥ VT, VDS ≥ VDS(SAT)

for VGS ≥ VT, VDS < VDS(SAT)

Drain Current - Linear Region

Drain Current - Saturation Region (Drive Current)

TGSDS VVSATV −=)(substituting

ID-VDS Equation: Square-Law Theory

L = channel lengthZ = channel width (perpendicular to L)µeff = surface mobility [~ 500 cm2/V·s for electrons in Si at 300K, ~ 150 cm2/V·s for holes]C’OX = gate capacitance per unit area = εOX/tOXβ = gain / transconductance factor

ββββ

Page 271: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 42Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

The Square Law Theory is a simple model of MOSFET operation. It assumes that the depletion region width for all points in the channel remains fixed at WT, even when VDS > 0. Note that ID varies linearly with VDS when VDS is small (VDS << VGS – VT , i.e. VDS<< VDS(SAT) ). As VDS approaches VDS(SAT), ID is reduced by the VDS

2/2 term, and the ID-VDS curve starts to slope over leading into saturation; this “slope over” transition region between linear and saturation is commonly called the triode region.

The multiplier out in front of the equation is sometimes referred to as the gain (aka. gain factor, transconductance factor), β, of the MOSFET.

Note that the electron mobility is typically much greater than the hole mobility - the exact values depend a great deal on the transistor design and process technology, but typically the electron mobility is 2 to 4 times greater than the hole mobility. Therefore, all other factors being equal, an N-channel transistor will have a higher drive current than a P-channel transistor (discussed later) - again, the difference is technology-dependent, but it is common to see N-channel transistors with 2 to 4 times more drive current than the equivalent P-channel transistor.

Note also that surface mobility decreases with increasing temperature, due to the increased frequency of scattering events. Thus, the MOSFET will have a lower ID at higher temperature.

The utility of the Square-Law Theory lies in its simplicity; it is useful for understanding general trends, basic inter-relationships, etc.

Page 272: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 43Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Useful Equations (cont.)

−−

−−= ++

B

DS

B

DSBWDS

DSTGS

OXeffD

VVVVVVVL

ZCIφφ

φµ4

3

211

23

34

2'

+−++

−−−=

B

W

B

W

B

TGS

WTGSDSVVVV

VVVSATVϕφφ 4

14

1

2

2)(

21 OX

OXTA

OX

TAW

tWqNC

WqNVε

=≡'

( )A

BST

qNW ϕε 22=

Square-Law Theory

Square-LawTheory

ID-VDS Equation: Bulk-Charge Theory

=i

ABB

nN

qTk lnφ

for VGS ≥ VT, VDS < VDS(SAT)

Page 273: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 44Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

The Bulk-Charge Theory is more complex than the Square-Law Theory, but gives results that are in better agreement with experimental observations. It takes into account the fact that the depletion region width (“bulk charge”) varies from source todrain, i.e. looking down the MOSFET channel, gate charge is not balanced solely by changes in the inversion charge, but also by changes in the depletion layer charge.

The extra terms in the Bulk Charge model act primarily to reduce ID and VDS(SAT) wrt. the Square Law Theory. The accuracy of the Square-Law Theory improves as the substrate doping and/or gate oxide thickness is decreased (i.e. as the body factor γ is decreased). In fact, for NA → 0 (i.e. φB → 0) and tox → 0 (i.e. VW → 0), the Bulk-Charge Theory mathematically reduces to the Square-Law Theory (because the multiplier in front of the second term goes to zero).

Many other models exist. Typically, accuracy is gained at the expense of simplicity. Many models are empirical or semi-empirical. Many apply to only a certain subset of MOSFETs, such as those of a certain size or geometry, or those fabricated on a particular fab process.

Page 274: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 45Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Useful Equations (cont.)

source: Pierret & Neudeck (editors), Modular Series on Solid State Devices, vol. 4, Addison-Wesley Publishing, 1988.

Page 275: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 46Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

This graph compares the Square-Law Theory to the Bulk-Charge Theory. Note that the Bulk-Charge result approaches the Square-Law prediction as the substrate doping is lowered.

Page 276: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 47Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Useful Equations (cont.)

Conductance

Transconductance

)( TGS VV −β

for VDS << (VGS – VT)

drain voltage

gate voltage

[ ] )()( TGSDSTGS VVVVV −≈−− ββ==

DS

D

dVdIgd

0 saturation

linear

==GS

D

dVdIgm

DSVβ

saturation

linear

LCZ OXeff 'µβ =where:

Page 277: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 48Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Conductance (g) is the reciprocal of resistance, i.e. g = 1/R. It measures the change in current for a given change in applied voltage.

When the transistor is operated in the linear regime, it behaves like a simple resistor. The ID-VDS characteristic is a straight line, the (constant) slope of which is equal to the conductance gd (aka. drain conductance or output conductance) of the device, i.e. the change in drain current that results for a given change in source-drain voltage. To obtain an expression for gd, we differentiate the ID-VDS relationship from the Square Law Theory wrt. VDS (to obtain an expression for the slope). Furthermore, in the linear region, far from saturation, we can make the simplification that VDS << VDS(SAT) , i.e. VDS << (VGS - VT). We see that the resulting expression for gd is constant wrt. VDS , as expected. It also shows that the conductance increases with increasing VGS , decreasing VT , wider Z (channel width), and/or shorter L (channel length), as expected. Note that as VDS approaches VDS(SAT) = VGS – VT , the conductance diminishes (triode region) and eventually becomes zero (saturation). This is also expected: the drain current does not change with drain voltage in saturation (slope = 0), as previously discussed.

The transconductance (gm) measures how the drain current changes with applied gate voltage. It is obtained by differentiating the ID expression from the Square-Law Theory wrt. VGS. For the linear region of operation, gm is proportional to VDS. In saturation (i.e. substituting VDS = VGS – VT, or differentiating the square-law expression for ID(SAT) directly) the transconductance is seen to be proportional to VGS. (These facts can be verified by careful inspection of the ID-VDS plots for various values of VGS.) As expected, the transconductance increases for decreasing VT , wider Z (channel width), and/or shorter L (channel length).

The conductance and transconductance are useful for modeling the behavior of transistors in circuits, especially when ac signalsare applied to the transistors.

Page 278: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 49Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Aside: Back Bias / Body Effect

P

••

N+ N+N+

-VBB•

BBs VB +=Ψ φ2

EC

EF

EV

q(Vbi + VBB)••••••••••••••••••••••••••••

oooooooooooooooooo

OX

BAS

BFBT

CVqN

VVBB

'22

2+

++=φε

φ

Surface potential at threshold with back bias:

Threshold voltage with back bias:

Page 279: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 50Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

We have studied the transistor with the backside/well contact grounded. We now study the case where the backside/well is biasedas shown*. Consider the effect on the source: the source diode is reverse biased by VBB, and hence the barrier height is increased to Vbi + VBB, which increases the threshold voltage of the MOSFET. The net effect is that VT is increased – the surface potential at threshold is now ΨS = 2φB + VBB. This also reduces subthreshold leakage and tends to make the subthreshold swing S smaller (i.e. steeper ID-VGS slope). The effect on S is more pronounced for devices with a larger body factor γ. The MOSFET’s reaction to backside biasing is sometimes called the body effect.

Back biasing was used as an electrical technique for increasing and tailoring the threshold voltage prior to the use of VT adjust implants. It is still used in some specialized applications. For example, the Intel® StrongARM (aka. XScaleTM) microprocessor employs this technique to reduce leakage current and achieve impressively low static power consumption, ideal for mobile/handheld applications and systems with low thermal tolerances/budgets (such a closely-packed microprocessor banks). (Note: This is just one of it’s power-saving techniques.)

* Note: One would not apply a +VBB bias to the substrate/well of an N-channel transistor. Doing so would forward bias the source diode, hence the gate would no longer control the transistor (it would always be on). Similarly, one would not apply a –VBB bias to a P-channel transistor. The backside bias can only be used to increase, not decrease, the threshold voltage.

Page 280: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 51Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Speed

0 V(logic 0)

+ Vcc(logic 1)

0 V(logic 0)

+ Vcc(logic 1)

e RCt−~eRC

t~

tideal

treal

C

RID(SAT)

time

V

V

higher drive current reduces this rise time, as does lower RC

higher drive current reduces this fall time (pull down), as does lower RC

Page 281: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 52Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

The speed (maximum clock frequency) of a circuit can be very important, e.g. for a microprocessor.

The speed of a circuit/chip depends heavily on its architecture and design. Architects and design engineers have become quite good at maximizing circuit speed.

Speed also depends a great deal on the transistors and interconnects (i.e. the fab process capabilities). Device engineers and process engineers have become quite good at tweaking every last drop of performance out of the transistors. It is very challenging to do this while maintaining good throughput, yield, and reliability.

The speed of a circuit depends on the amount of charge that must be moved to charge/discharge nodes (RC) and the current available to move it (ID(SAT)). From the transistor and process technology standpoint, to maximize clock speed (frequency):

1. Increase the drive current, ID(SAT). This allows the transistor to charge an interconnect line faster, thus driving the next stage (RC load) from logic 0 → 1 faster. It also allows a pull-down transistor to discharge a line faster, driving it from logic 1 → 0faster.

2. Decrease the resistance and/or capacitance of the metal interconnect lines. This reduce the RC time delay of the circuit, allowing signals to propagate faster.

Page 282: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 53Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Speed (cont.)

P

•••

source gate drain

backside/well

N+ N+L

tOX

( )TGS

eff

VVLCZSATI OX

D −=2

2')( µ

Page 283: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 54Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

To increase drive current:

Reduce the channel length (L)

• Increased off-state leakage current

• Leads to short-channel effects (discussed later ): hot electron effects, DIBL/punchthrough, VT reduction, velocity saturation, channel length modulation

Reduce the threshold voltage (VT)

• Lighter substrate/well doping: leads to short channel effects (increases W at source/drain), of particular concern: degrades punchthrough margin

• Thinner gate oxide (tOX)

- Increased reliability concerns about oxide wearout, increased susceptibility to defects/pinholes in gate oxide

- Reduced dielectric breakdown voltage

- Increased gate leakage current (tunnel current)

- Increased susceptibility to electrostatic discharge (ESD) – during fabrication (plasma processing), or handling of the packaged chip (static charge build-up on pins)

-- Antenna (NAC) diodes are used to protect gates during fabrication

-- ESD protection circuits are included in the I/O pads

• Raise the gate dielectric constant (εOX), e.g. nitridation of gate oxide, high-K gate dielectrics, etc.

• Note: VT must stay above the noise margin (typically on the order of 0.1V): shallow VT adjust implants are used to raise the surface doping and hence |VT|

Increase the supply voltage

• Reliability concerns (e.g. gate oxide wearout, hot electron effects, latchup, etc.)

• Increased power dissipation and thermal concerns (ultimately limits circuit density and maximum speed of operation)

Increase the channel width (Z)

• Reduces transistor density (increases die size)

• Increases gate capacitance (because increases gate area)

To reduce RC:

Reduce metal, via, and silicon-contact resistances

• silicided source/gate/drain contacts

• good circuit layout practices – e.g. use larger and/or more contact openings (note: limits circuit density), optimize metal routing, etc.

• copper interconnects (lower resistivity than aluminum)

• thicker/wider metal lines (note: this will decrease R but increase C in general)

Reduce parasitic capacitances in the circuit interconnects

• low-K interlayer dielectrics (ILD)

• thinner and/or narrower metal lines (note: this will decrease C but increase R), spaced farther apart (note: increased pitch will reduce circuit density)

• Manhattan layout (metal lines on alternating layers are orthogonal, minimizing overlap area)

Reduce parasitic resistances and capacitances in the transistors (discussed in more detail shortly)

• shallow source/drain junctions (reduced junction capacitance), reduced gate-to-source/drain overlap (Miller) capacitance, etc.

• good layout practices can reduce series resistance

Temperature Dependence:

Note that surface mobility (µeff) decreases with increasing temperature (due to increased scattering w/ oxide interface and Si atoms) thus reducing β and hence ID(SAT). It can be shown that β and ID(SAT) are proportional to T-1.5. (Note: VT is reduced as temperature increases, as discussed in module 3, but this effect is less pronounced than the reduction in β). Metal resistances also increase with increasing temperature. Therefore, circuit speed decreases as temperature increases. Note that leakage current (junction leakage and subthreshold leakage) also increases with increasing temperature. (The increase in subthreshold leakage current is due to the reduced threshold voltage.)

Page 284: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 55Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Parasitic Capacitances

P

N+N+

ILD 1

gate oxide

metal 1lines

vias / contacts

metal 2lines

ILD 0

CdbCsb

CgbCgs Cgd

LOVLeff

L

Page 285: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 56Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

This diagram shows the parasitic capacitances inherent in the MOSFET structure. They are called “parasitic” because they act as loads in the circuit – i.e. these capacitors must be charged and discharged as the transistors change logic states (0 ↔ 1). This slows down the transistor circuit. (There may be more capacitances than these to consider, especially for advanced transistor designs. These are the most common ones, and we will used them to illustrate the basic concepts.)

Parasitic Capacitances inside the Transistor:

The parasitic capacitances internal to the transistor limit its switching speed, i.e. how fast the device can charge/discharge its own capacitances in response to a change in applied voltage. The gate-to-source/drain overlap capacitance is sometimes called the Miller capacitance (denoted Cgs and Cgd above). The overlap results from lateral diffusion of the source and drain implanted regions due to subsequent thermal cycles in the fabrication process. It is desirable to minimize the overlap area in order to minimize this capacitance. However, note that in modern FET structures, the poly-Si gate is actually much thicker than the channel is long (contrary to the diagram above, which is not to scale). Hence the fringing component of the overlap capacitance is non-negligible, and can not be reduced to zero even if the actual overlap area is.

The gate capacitance Cgb is a two-sided story. When we consider the transistor as a driver, we want a high gate capacitance in order to create a stronger channel at a given applied gate voltage, thus increasing the drive current and hence the circuit speed. But when we consider the transistor as a load, we would prefer to have a low gate capacitance. This trade-off must be effectively managed by circuit designers. However, for a properly designed digital circuit, the trade-off is clearly in favor of using thinner gate oxides to maximize the drive current of the transistors. Aside: An additional capacitance in the gate comes from poly depletion (not shown) – i.e. the fact that, unlike a metal gate electrode, a depletion region will form inside the poly-Si gate electrode at the poly-SiO2 interface. (And as you might expect, this poly depletion will also affect other device parametrics such as the threshold voltage, since the applied gate voltage now drops across the poly depletion layer, the gate oxide, and the depletion region underneath the gate.) This poly depletion region is minimized by heavily doping the poly-Si (specifically, at the poly-SiO2 interface).

We know that the source and drain regions are PN junctions, and hence each has a junction capacitance Cj associated with it (due to the fixed ionic charge in the depletion region). Recall that, to a first order approximation, Cj = εsA/W, hence the capacitance can be reduced by using a lower doping concentration on the light (substrate/well) side of the junction, which will increase W. (This, however, will reduce punchthrough margin, as discussed later, and may also affect other device parametrics such as threshold voltage.) As transistors are scaled down to become smaller and denser, the junctions must also be scaled down (i.e. shallower junctions and less area) in order to maintain and maximize the speed performance. This can be accomplished with shallower source and drain implants, and by minimizing the thermal cycles of subsequent processing in order to minimize diffusion (e.g. perhaps by using rapid thermal annealing (RTA), etc.). However, shallow junctions do create other processing complexities (e.g. the danger of saliciding through the junctions), which must be managed. (Other courses address such issues in greater detail.)

Parasitic Capacitances in the Interconnects:

Parasitic capacitance is present where there is conductive material (i.e. metal or silicon) separated by insulator. Capacitance slows down the circuit, and causes capacitive coupling (noise/interference) between neighboring signal lines. There is parasitic capacitance between metal-1 lines and the silicon surface, and between layers of metal (in the case shown here, between metal-1 lines and metal-2 lines). Thicker ILD will reduce this capacitance, but there are practical limits on how thick the ILD can be from a processing standpoint. Using narrower metal lines will also reduce this capacitance (by reducing the overlapping surface area), but of course this also raises the resistance of the metal lines (by reducing the cross-sectional area). A “Manhattan” layout, whereby the metal lines in alternating layers are orthogonal, can also help to reduce the capacitance in the IC by minimizing the total metal-metal overlap area. There is also parasitic capacitance between adjacent, parallel metal lines. While reducing the thickness of these metal lines will decrease this capacitance (by decreasing the sidewall area), it will also increase the resistance of the metal line (by reducing the cross-sectional area).

The resistances of the metal lines, and the parasitic capacitances between them, make up the RC load of the interconnect circuitry. Larger RC product results in larger propagation delay for signals, and hence a slower circuit. Therefore, it is desirable to minimize RC.

Page 286: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 57Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Parasitic Capacitances (cont.)

OV

OX

OXOV ZL

tC ε=

eff

OX

OXOX ZL

tC ε=

WAC js

jε=

where: overlap (Miller) capacitance

gate capacitance

PN junction capacitance

CjCjCjCdb

CjCjCjCsb

00COXCgb

COVCOVCgd

COVCgs

SaturationLinear (triode)

Off (subthreshold)

CjCjCjCdb

CjCjCjCsb

00COXCgb

COVCOVCgd

COVCgs

SaturationLinear (triode)

Off (subthreshold)

OVC C32

OX +OVC C21

OX +

OVC C21

OX +

MOS Capacitor:- Inversion layer is electrically isolated from the outside world - Inversion charge comes from R-G of minority carriers- Capacitance depends on frequency

MOSFET:- Inversion layer (channel) is electrically connected to source/drain - Source is an ample supply of electrons at any practical frequency- Charge fluctuates on either side of gate oxide (like parallel-plate) - MOSFET gate capacitance is εOXA/tOX at any practical frequency

?what about the MOS capacitor C-V frequency dependence?

Page 287: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 58Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

This table shows how to approximate the MOSFET internal capacitances using straightforward expressions that are reasonably accurate. Of course, more in-depth modeling can be performed when more precise capacitance values are required (this typically involves integrating the charge distributions in the regions of interest).

Off:

When the MOSFET is off (i.e. VGS << VT), no channel exists and hence Cgs = Cgd = COV, where COV is the gate-to-source/drain overlap (Miller) capacitance discussed previously. COV can be calculated from the overlap area, using the expression above. The gate-to-substrate capacitance Cgb can be approximated as the parallel-plate capacitance of the gate, CG (note that the effective channel length, Leff = L - 2LOV, is used in this expression). Csb and Cdb are the source and drain PN junction capacitances, and can be approximated using the expression given for Cj (see PN Junction module). Note that none of these expressions take fringing fields (perimeter capacitance) into account.

Linear:

In the linear operating regime, a channel is present from source to drain. A more precise definition of Cgs is that it is the gate-to-channel capacitance represented as a lumped capacitance at the source end. And similarly for Cgd. The total gate-to-channel capacitance is CG, and we arbitrarily lump ½CG at each end of the channel (sometimes it is necessary to revisit this “symmetrical” partitioning of COX and change the source-to-drain ratio). The channel effectively “shields” the substrate from the influence of the gate (i.e. the capacitance associated with the subgate region has been accounted for in the gate-to-channel capacitance), so Cgb drops to zero. Regarding the junction capacitances, recall that the depletion depth W will be greater at the drain end (reverse-biased by VDS).

Saturation:

In saturation, the channel is pinched-off from the drain. There is no inversion charge at the drain end, and potential variations at the drain end do not influence the channel charge. Therefore, there is no contribution to Cgd from the channel, and the overlap capacitance is all that’s left: Cgd = COV. In saturation, the channel takes on a triangular shape as previously discussed (i.e. deeper channel at the source end, tapering off to zero at the pinch-off point near the drain). The gate-to-source capacitance Csb is affected by the channel charge, and a detailed treatment of the triangular channel suggests that only about 2/3 of CG should be added to Cgs.

Important Note on MOSFET Gate Capacitance: Consider the P-substrate/well MOS capacitor discussed in module 4 vs. the N-Channel (P-substrate/well) MOSFET discussed here. Recall that the inversion capacitance of the MOS capacitor depends on the frequency of operation – at lower frequencies, the inversion layer could respond (via minority carrier R-G) to provide charge balance; at higher frequencies, charge was balanced by depletion charge (majority carrier response) because the minority carrier R-G process was not fast enough. It is important to note that the inversion layer in a MOS Capacitor is isolated from the outside world; minority carrier generation is its only source of electrons. A very important difference exists for the transistor: the MOSFET inversion layer (channel) is electrically connected to the outside world through the source and drain, and the channel charge comes from the source (not from minority carrier generation). The source is an ample supply of electrons even at very high frequencies. So at any practical frequency of operation, the MOSFET has charge fluctuating on either side of the gate oxide like a parallel-plate capacitor, hence Cg = εOXA/tOX. However, the C-V information presented in the previous module is useful for understanding some fundamental aspects of device physics, and for characterizing discrete MOS capacitors (e.g. during process development, as a fab process monitor, or for failure analysis purposes).

Page 288: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 59Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Series Resistance

RsIDRs

VDS

V’DS

( ) DSVVVLCZI TGS

OXeffD '' −= µ

sDDSDS RIVV 2' −=

( ) DS

R

VVVVV

CLZI TGSTGS

OXeffD −

−+=

)(1')/(

αµ

LZRC sOXeff

R'2µα =where:

P

•••

source gate drain

backside/well

RsRs N+N+

Page 289: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 60Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

It should also be noted that there are parasitic resistances associated with the source and drain regions. If these regions are silicided and the transistors are laid out properly, these resistances can be largely ignored for most digital circuit applications. However, it may not be appropriate to ignore these resistances for some analog and digital circuits, especially if a very aggressive fabrication process is used. In general this series resistance is undesirable because it reduces drain current, contributes to the RC delay, and dissipates power in the form of heat.

This resistance has several components: (1) the resistance of the doped source/drain region; (2) the resistance associated with the metal-to-silicon contact; and (3) the “spreading resistance” due to current crowding in going from the doped source/drain region to the “sheet” of inversion charge in the channel. The resistance of the doped source/drain regions is minimized by doping them heavily (degenerately). The metal-to-silicon contact resistance is minimized by using silicide in the fabrication process (a silicide is a metal-silicon alloy such as titanium silicide (TiSi2) or cobalt silicide (CoSi2) formed at the interface to provide a lower-resistance contact).

We lump all three of these components into one constant Rs representing the total series resistance. We assume for simplicity that the source and drain resistances are each equal to Rs. We designate V’DS to be the voltage drop across the channel alone in the absence of all series resistance. We let VDS be the voltage drop across the device including the series resistances, such that V’DS = VDS – 2IDRs (by Kirchoff’s voltage law). We substitute this into the IDS-VDS expression from the square-law theory, and assume that VDS << VGS – VT (so that we can ignore the VDS

2 term for illustration purposes) and that IDRs << VGS – VT (to ignore the reduction in the effective gate-to-source voltage). Observe that αR will be small for a conservative fabrication process (larger L, thicker tOX, larger contact windows, etc.), hence the series resistance has a relatively small effect and ID will be close to the ideal case (where it is assumed that Rs = 0). However, αR will be larger for a more aggressive process, and will reduce ID accordingly.

Of course, more sophisticated resistance modeling can be performed (though, typically, accuracy is gained at the expense of simplicity). This simple model is presented to illustrate the basic concepts surrounding source/drain series resistance.

It should be noted that the poly-Si gate resistance can be considered as well, which consists of the resistance of the poly-Si (minimized by doping it heavily) and the contact resistance (minimized by using silicide). With proper layout this resistance can be ignored for most digital circuit applications. Its main effect is to reduce the effective gate voltage by placing an IR drop between the gate power source (signal) and the gate oxide.

Page 290: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 61Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Speed (cont.)

ID(SAT)

maximumclock

frequency

Transistor Limited(drive current)

Interconnect Limited(RC)

Page 291: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 62Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

By plotting the maximum clock frequency of the chip vs. the drive current, we can see where the circuit becomes RC limited --a.k.a. “interconnect limited”, or “back-end limited” since the metal/ILD layers (and perhaps the chip package is included here too) are the “back end” of the IC manufacturing process. In the RC limited regime, increasing the drive current of the transistors has little or no effect on the speed of the circuit, because the limiting factor is the RC time (propagation) delay in the circuit interconnects. Appreciable speed improvements can only be made by reducing the RC of the interconnect circuitry. For example, this is the main reason why the industry has switched from aluminum interconnects to copper, because copper has a much lower resistance. Another example is the use of low-k dielectrics* for ILD -- the lower dielectric constant means lower capacitance for the interconnect circuitry.

Delays along the critical “speed paths” (bottlenecks) in the circuit can be reduced by improving the circuit design. Thus, it is common to see subsequent versions/revisions of an IC become progressively faster, as the critical speed paths are identified and re-engineered by the design team. So improving the speed of a chip is a joint effort between the design community and the manufacturing / CMOS process development community.

* The name “low-k” refers to the common definition of the dielectric constant as k = ε/ε0 , where ε is the permittivity of the material in question and ε0 is the permittivity of free space. Recalling that, in general, capacitance can be expressed as C = εA/t, where A is the overlap area and t is the thickness of the dielectric, we see that lower k implies lower ε, which in turn implies lower capacitance. As previously discussed, ILD is typically made of SiO2 (perhaps with small amounts of phosphorous to act as a contamination gettering agent), and the addition of fluorine can be used to form a low-k dielectric.

Page 292: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 63Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

The P-Channel MOSFET at a Glance

N

P+

••

VT < VGS < 0 -VDS

P+ P+

ID

VDS

ID

0

VGS = -3 V

VGS = -2 V

VGS = -1 V

VDS(SAT) = VGS - VT

LinearSaturation

o o o o o o o o o o

VGS = +3 V

VGS = +2 V

VGS = +1 V

P-channel MOSFET

N-channel MOSFET

Linear

Saturation

Page 293: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 64Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

The forgoing discussion has focused on the N-Channel MOSFET for illustration purposes, but the basic concepts are directly applicable to P-Channel MOSFETs as well.

For the P-Channel MOSFET, the current carriers are holes rather than electrons, and therefore the polarities of the gate voltage, threshold voltage, and drain voltage are negative, opposite to the case of the N-Channel device.

The basic operation of the device is analogous to that of the N-Channel MOSFET. A negative gate voltage greater than (in magnitude) the threshold voltage is applied to invert the semiconductor surface in the channel region, creating a hole channel which connects the source and drain. A negative drain voltage is applied to attract the holes, creating a drain current. For lower drain voltage, the ID-VDS relationship is linear; for VDS ≥ VDS(SAT) (in magnitude), the drain current is saturated. Note that thedrain current flows in the opposite direction of the N-channel case.

As previously noted, holes have a lower effective mobility than electrons, and therefore, all other things being equal, a P-Channel MOSFET will have lower drive current than an N-channel transistor. This can readily be seen on the graph above. And because the lower mobility limits acceleration, “hot hole” effects (discussed later) are generally not observed.

Page 294: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 65Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Why Silicon?

Silicon is the semiconductor of choice for the modern digital IC industry:

Good native oxide (SiO2)

Low junction leakage

Good thermal and mechanical properties

Manufacturing maturity and lower cost

Counter points- GaAs preferred for high-frequency analog devices and photonic devices- SiGe, the future choice for high-speed circuits?

Page 295: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 66Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

We are now at a good point to discuss why silicon is the semiconductor of choice for the modern digital IC industry, vs. other semiconductors such as Germanium (Ge) or Gallium-Arsenide (GaAs). We also highlight some devices and applications where other semiconductors are preferred over Si, to illustrate that the best semiconductor for the job depends on the job!

• Good native oxide (SiO2). Good adhesion properties, good dielectric properties, low-stress interface, easy to grow. High-quality gate oxides and isolation oxides. Low density of interface traps (states) relative to other oxides (interface traps retard the motion of carriers in the channel, reducing the effective/surface mobility). Germanium’s oxide (Ge2O3) is difficult to grow, is a poor-quality insulator, begins to dissociate at ~700 oC, and is water soluble (there are lots of furnace cycles and water rinses in the fab process!). Gallium-arsenide also has a very poor native oxide, hence oxides are usually deposited (not grown) on GaAs and generally are of inferior quality.

Low junction leakage. Si has a larger band gap than Ge, thus reducing PN junction leakage current (I0). (Review the expression for I0 in the PN Junction module – note that a larger band gap implies a lower ni and hence reduced leakage current.) This is very important for CMOS devices, especially as transistor densities increase, because it reduces static power consumption and the non-idealities associated with leakage current (discussed previously).

Good thermal and mechanical properties. Si has a higher thermal conductivity than Ge and GaAs, which is desirable for conducting heat away from devices and circuits. Si is also a relatively robust material, unlike GaAs which is very brittle and hence difficult to work with in a manufacturing environment. GaAs is also toxic and carcinogenic, requiring additional safety measures for workers and the environment, whereas Si is a much safer substance to work with.

Manufacturing maturity and lower cost. The first devices and integrated circuits were made using Ge. However, Si quickly replaced Ge, for some of the reasons cited above, and now enjoys a maturity in terms of process technology that makes it much cheaper than other materials.

Counter Points. GaAs has a much higher electron mobility than Si, and is the dominant technology for very high frequency analog devices (e.g. mixers, multipliers, etc.). GaAs (and other hybrid semiconductors) is also preferred for photonic and opto-electronic devices, such as photodetectors and semiconductor lasers, because it is a direct band gap material (not discussed). Silicon-Germanium devices have also been introduced, and are capable of higher-speed operation than pure Si devices – such devices may gain popularity in future generations of digital integrated circuits.

Page 296: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 67Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Exercise: Linear I-V of a MOSFET1. Derive an expression for the amount of inversion charge in an N-Channel MOSFET for a given applied gate voltage VGS ≥ VT. (Hint: Q = CV.)

2. If a source-to-drain voltage VDS is applied across this channel, derive an expression for the current through the MOSFET, assuming it is in the linear region of operation (i.e. VDS << VDS(SAT) ). (Hint: the charge Q is injected into the channel at the source end by the forward-biased junction and drifts to

the drain under the influence of the source-to-drain electric field ε = vd /µn = VDS /L.)

3. What is the resistance R of the channel?

Page 297: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 68Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Are the equations you have derived here consistent with those presented earlier in this module?

Page 298: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 69Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Exercise: Linear I-V of a MOSFET - Solution

)(')()( TGSOXTGS

OX

OXTGS

OX

OX VVZLCVVtZLVV

tACVQ −=−=−== εε

2. The drain current is the amount of charge moving across the channel per unit time. The forward-biased source junction injects a charge Q of electrons into the channel, which will drift across the channel to the drain in a time t dictated by the source-to-drain electric field, effective electron mobility, and channel length.

DSTGSOXeff

D

effDSeffDSeffd

D

VVVLCZI

VLVLL

vLt

tQI

L

)(')/(

2

−=

====

=

µµµµε

3. The conductance is readily obtained from the above expression. Resistance is the reciprocal of conductance.

gR

VVLCZ

VIg TGS

OXeff

DS

D

1

)('

=

−== µ

1. Only values of VGS above VT create inversion charge, therefore (VGS - VT) is the “effective voltage” for inversion.

ε = source-to-drain electric fieldvd = drift velocity (speed) of electrons

Page 299: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 70Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

These equations are consistent with those presented earlier in this module. Note that we have only considered the linear region of operation of the MOSFET here.

Page 300: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 71Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Part 2 - Small Geometry MOSFET

Page 301: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 72Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

We will now study the physics of small-geometry (short-channel) MOSFETs.

Page 302: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 73Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

MOSFET - Short Channel

P

•••

source gate drain

backside/well

N+ N+L

Page 303: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 74Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

When the depletion regions at the source and drain junctions are a negligible fraction of the channel length (L) and width (Z), the transistor is said to be a large-geometry MOSFET. Up to this point, we have been discussing large-geometry MOSFETs.

When the source/drain depletion regions are an appreciable fraction of L (but not Z), the transistor is called a short-channelMOSFET. If the source/drain depletion regions are also an appreciable fraction of Z, it is a small-geometry MOSFET. In either case, the behavior deviates from that of the large-geometry MOSFET. The presence of the depletion regions can no longer be ignored, as they have a noticeable impact on the threshold voltage and the ID-VDS relationship. There are also some reliability issues associate with short-channel transistors, such as hot electron effects.

Note that making the poly gate shorter will reduce L, and increase the short-channel behavior. Note also that reducing the well/substrate doping will increase the depletion region width at the source/drain edge, also increasing the short-channel behavior. (It is also worthwhile to note that making the gate oxide thinner will reduce the amount of short-channel behavior, as it gives the gate more control over the channel region and makes the electric field lines more vertical in the depletion regions.)

* Technical Aside: For a large-geometry MOSFET, the source and drain depletion regions are of negligible size compared to the length and width of the channel, and therefore the electric field lines are regarded as vertical for all points along the channel, even near the source and drain (this is sometimes referred to as the gradual channel approximation). This essentially allows us to ignore the “edge effects” and model the subgate electric field as one-dimensional. However, if the depletion regions are an appreciable fraction of L only (or Z only, though this “narrow-width transistor” is not common) the subgate electric field becomes two-dimensional. If they are an appreciable fraction of L and Z it becomes three-dimensional.

Page 304: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 75Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Short Channel MOSFET – Hot Electron Effects

N+ N+electron

• +VDS+VGS•

••

peak electricfield region

Channel Hot Electron (CHE) Injection

gate oxide

Impact Ionization

N+ N+electron

• +VDS+VGS•

••

peak electricfield region

gate oxide •• •o oo o*

ISUB

Page 305: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 76Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Channel Hot Electron Injection (CHE)

The drain voltage drops across a smaller length in a short-channel transistor, hence there is a higher electric field in the channel region. This high field accelerates electrons to high velocities, hence they are called “hot” electrons. The peak field occurs near the drain junction. Hot electrons can be injected into the gate oxide near the drain edge, where they become trapped charges. As the concentration of trapped charge builds up over time, the threshold voltage shifts (increases for N-channel). At some point, the circuit may stop working properly. This is a reliability concern.

Note that CHE is not always a bad thing. While it is a very undesirable effect in MOSFETs, CHE is the key ingredient for devices such as Flash EEPROM memory cells (discussed in module 5).

Impact Ionization

Hot electrons can gain enough kinetic energy to cause impact ionization at the drain junction (see the PN Junction presentation for more on impact ionization). Electrons created via the impact can be injected into the gate oxide near the drain, where they become trapped; over time this trapped charge can build up, shifting the threshold voltage until the circuit no longer works properly. This is a reliability concern. Holes created via impact ionization are repelled by the drain voltage and diffuse into the substrate, where they contribute to the substrate current ISUB. Substrate current is generally undesirable because it can have detrimental effects on the circuit (e.g. can trigger latchup, can cause poor refresh times in DRAM, can introduce noise in mixed-signal circuits, etc.).

Note: Because holes have a much lower mobility than electrons, “hot hole” effects are usually not of concern in P-Channel transistors.

Hot electron effects are less of a concern at lower supply (drain) voltages. Also, LDD (Lightly-Doped Drain) or “tip” implants can be used to grade the drain junction, thus reducing the peak electric field and suppressing hot electrons (see module 1 for information on graded junctions). This, however, reduces the performance of the transistor, due to the increased source/drain capacitance.

Of additional concern are circuit nodes that are subject to ESD (electrostatic discharge) events or voltage overshoot/overstress – these transistors may experience occasional source-drain voltage “spikes” that cause short bursts of hot electron activity; proper design guards against such circuit behavior.

Page 306: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 77Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Short Channel MOSFET – DIBL & Punchthrough

P

••VGS = 0 ramp +VDS

N+ N+

Wd

L

VBR

observeddrain

breakdownvoltage

Punchthrough

Normal JunctionBreakdown

(large-geometry FET)(short-channel FET)

Ws

P

••VGS > VT

ramp +VDS

N+ N+

WdWs

VDS

ID

0

DIBL / Punchthrough

εεεεdrain

Page 307: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 78Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

In a short-channel MOSFET, the source and drain may be close enough for the drain voltage to influence the source diode. The width of the depletion region at the drain (Wd) is determined by the drain voltage (reverse-bias); Wd increases with VDS. For the ideal PN junction, it was assumed that the electric field (voltage) exists only in the depletion region. For a real PN junction, however, the electric field extends somewhat beyond the depletion region edges (i.e. the edges are not sharply defined). Hence, the drain voltage can influence the source junction if the source and drain are in close proximity.

DIBL: The source and drain are close enough that the drain voltage can influence the source junction. The drain voltage lowers the source barrier, forward biasing the source diode somewhat and increasing the diffusion current. This is called Drain Induced Barrier Lowering, or DIBL (pronounced “dibble”). With DIBL, the gate voltage and drain voltage both influence the source barrier (unlike a large-geometry MOSFET, where the source barrier is modulated by the gate voltage only). DIBL gives rise to a lower threshold voltage (i.e. VT is now a function of VDS) and higher off-state leakage current, which is undesirable because it increases static power consumption and may contribute to other problems (e.g. noise, latchup, etc.). DIBL can also cause the linear or saturation drain current to exhibit a diode-like increase as a function of VDS, as shown above. If DIBL becomes severe enough, the drain voltage can actually have more influence on the source barrier than the gate voltage does, interfering with the operation of the MOSFET.

Punchthrough: If the drain depletion region extends far enough to touch the source depletion region (i.e. Ws + Wd ≈ L), source-to-drain punchthrough has occurred in the MOSFET. The source junction becomes forward biased by the drain voltage, and a source-to-drain current arises. This current, which flows through the contiguous depletion region from source to drain, is called space charge limited current, and goes as VDS

2/L3. Hence the transistor has a high off-state leakage current, and if the punchthrough becomes severe enough, the transistor may not work at all (i.e. the gate can’t turn the transistor off).

DIBL and punchthrough can be thought of as different degrees of the same phenomenon. The terms are sometimes used interchangeably, though the term punchthrough should be reserved for space charge limited current (i.e. source electrons injected into a depletion region connecting directly to the drain) whereas DIBL refers to PN junction injection (i.e. source electrons injected across the source depletion region and into the P-type subgate region).

The shorter the gate, the more susceptible the transistor is to DIBL and punchthrough. Reducing the substrate/well doping also makes the transistor more susceptible to DIBL and punchthrough, as this causes Ws and Wd to become larger. The transistor must be designed such that the drain can resist the “back pressure” of VDS and avoid punchthrough.

Page 308: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 79Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Short Channel MOSFET – Threshold Voltage

L

VT

(large-geometry FET)(short-channel FET)

−+=−=∆ 121

')()(

j

Tj

OX

TATTT

rW

Lr

CWqNlongVshortVV

ds

WTrjj

P

L

L’

W

rN+

W

N+

Page 309: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 80Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

For a large-geometry MOSFET, the threshold voltage is determined primarily by the gate oxide thickness and the doping concentration underneath the gate oxide. The influence of the source/drain depletion regions is negligible, and VT is not sensitive to L.

For a short-channel MOSFET, the source/drain depletion regions make up a non-negligible fraction of the channel length, and their effect on VT must be considered.

A close-up view of the source/drain edges shows the effect of lateral diffusion of the source/drain implants. The dopant diffuses laterally underneath the gate edges, and has a rounded profile characterized by a radius rj (which is approximately the junction depth). (The amount of lateral diffusion is typically 0.7 to 1 times the vertical (downward) diffusion, depending on the details of the fabrication process.)

In order for a channel to be created beneath the gate, the silicon there must be depleted and then inverted. The source and drain depletion regions assist in inverting the bulk region under the gate. In the illustration above, some of the B- subgate depletion charge (e.g. in the shaded triangular regions) is balanced by the Phos+ charge on the N-sides of the source and drain depletion regions (rather than being balanced by the gate charge). Thus, less gate charge is required to start inversion, and VT is reduced.

This effect is negligible for large-geometry MOSFETs – all the charge in the subgate region (i.e. a rectangle of length L) is assumed to be balanced by the gate charge. However, for a small-geometry MOSFET, the charge compensation by the source/drain regions can not be ignored, and the gate is responsible for balancing the charge in the trapezoidal region of side lengths L and L’. This geometry can be used to derive the expression above for ∆VT, the difference between the short-channel and long-channel threshold voltage. By examining ∆VT / VT(long), the relevant quantity for gauging the degree of short-channel behavior, we see that there is less short-channel behavior for thinner gate oxide (tOX), higher doping concentration (NA), shallower junction depth (rj), and longer channel (L).

The VT dependence on L leads to a VT mismatch between long and short transistors. This is undesirable for some circuits. A halo implant can be used to achieve a closer match between the long- and short-channel VT’s. (Other courses discuss such fabrication techniques in detail.)

Page 310: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 81Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Short Channel MOSFET – ID-VDS Relationship

VDS

ID

0

VGS = +3 V

VGS = +2 V

VGS = +1 V

LinearSaturation

short-channel

long-channel

longD

a

DSlongDDSshortD SATI

VVSATIVSATI )(

||1)()1()(

+=+= λ

Va

Page 311: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 82Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

For a large-geometry MOSFET, it was assumed that the drain depletion region width (Wd) was a negligible fraction of the channel length (L), and hence could be ignored when considering the ID-VDS relationship in saturation. Any change in Wd due to VDS was assumed to be insignificant, having no impact on the saturation characteristic.

For a small-geometry MOSFET, Wd is a non-negligible fraction of the channel length, and modulation of Wd by VDS can not be ignored. As VDS is increased beyond pinchoff, Wd also increases, thus resulting in a smaller effective channel length Leff and an increased drain current ID. Hence, the drain current is not constant wrt. VDS in the saturation regime for a short-channel MOSFET.

As gate length is reduced, the slope of the ID-VDS curve in saturation becomes greater.

The Early voltage, Va, is the extrapolated zero-current intercept of the saturation ID-VDS characteristic. It can be used for a semi-empirical calculation of the short-channel saturation current, as shown in the equation above. Note that its reciprocal, λ (units of V-1), is sometimes used instead. In this equation, ID(SAT)long is the long-channel saturation current (e.g. calculated from the square-law theory). Observe that as Va → ∞, ID(SAT)short → ID(SAT)long, as expected. For a given Va, ID(SAT)short varies linearly with VDS.

Page 312: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 83Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Short Channel MOSFET – Velocity Saturation

eff

satdsatsat

uLvLV )(== ε

VDS

ID

0

VGS = +3 V

VGS = +2 V

VGS = +1 V

Vsat = drain voltage at which velocity saturation occursvd(sat) = saturation drift velocity

εsat = electric field for velocity saturation (assumed same for electrons/holes)

| MOSFET Saturation Voltage | = min[ |Vsat| , |VGS - VT| ]

Drain voltage for velocity saturation:

velocity saturation

voltage

channel pinch-off voltage

ID(SAT) – VGS steps are linear for velocity saturation

satTGSOXD effVVZCSATI εµ)(')( −≈

Drain current and transconductance:

vd(sat)

VGS = +1 V

VGS = +2 V

with velocity saturationwithout velocity saturation

)('' satdOXeffOX vZCZCg satm =≈ εµ

Page 313: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 84Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

We discussed velocity saturation in module 1. Recall that electrons and holes reach a saturation drift velocity vd(sat) of about 107 cm/s, and the electric field at which this occurs (εsat) is about 3x104 V/cm (3 V/µm) for electrons and 105 V/cm (10 V/µm) for holes. These values for εsat pertain to electron and hole motion through bulk silicon; εsat values for carrier motion at the surface of a MOSFET depend on the transistor design and process technology but are often in the range 0.5 - 3.5 V/ µm (for simplicity, a single value is often used for both electrons and holes).

In a short-channel MOSFET, the carriers in the channel may achieve velocity saturation at some drain voltage lower (in magnitude) than the pinchoff voltage VDS(SAT) = VGS – VT (and hence the saturation current will be correspondingly lower). The expression for this velocity saturation voltage, Vsat, is given above. If this occurs, the MOSFET ID-VDS curve will saturate at VDS = Vsat (due to velocity saturation) instead of VDS = VGS – VT (due to channel pinchoff). In other words, the MOSFET can not produce more current ID in response to increases in VDS because the carriers can’t move across the channel any faster.

Thus, the observed saturation voltage of a MOSFET will either be Vsat or VGS – VT, whichever is lower (in magnitude). For long-channel devices, Vsat is very large, and the saturation voltage will be VGS – VT (pinchoff). For short-channel devices, however, it is often the case that ID saturates due to velocity saturation before (instead of) pinchoff, and the observed saturation voltage is Vsat.

The easiest way to tell whether the MOSFET saturation is due to velocity saturation of pinchoff is to observe the relationship between the saturation current and the applied gate voltage. If it is quadratic (i.e. ID(SAT) goes as VGS

2 similar to the square-law theory), the saturation is due to pinchoff. If it is linear, the saturation is due to velocity saturation (i.e. increasing the gate voltage causes a proportional increase in inversion charge and hence drain current, as indicated by the expression above).

Note from the equation above that ID(SAT) is independent of L for the case of velocity saturation! This can be understood by recognizing that the transit time for carriers to traverse the channel under velocity saturation is directly proportional to L (t = L/vd(sat)). Assuming the channel charge is constant, it is also directly proportional to L (Qn = qnsZL, where ns here is the charge per unit area in the “sheet” of inversion charge). The current is I = Qn/t, and hence Lcancels out. In other words, there is a constant charge flow per unit W, and L does not matter (provided of course that it is small enough to allow velocity saturation in the first place, per the first equation above).

Note that because electrons and holes converge to the same value of vd(sat), as discussed in module 1, N-channel and P-channel MOSFETs tend to have the same ID(SAT) under velocity saturation conditions, other things being equal. In other words, the performance advantage of N-channel transistors over P-channel transistors largely disappears if the transistors are velocity saturated.

Page 314: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 85Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Aside: Modeling Non-Idealities & Small-Geometry Effects

[ ]

++−+

+−−

=

sat

DSBSBDSTGS

DSDSDSTGSOX

D

LVVVZLVV

VVVZLVVLZC

I

εθθ

δµ

1),,('1

)1(21)],,('[' 2

0

models DIBL, and short-channel and narrow-width effects on VT

models effective mobility dependence on vertical field

models velocity saturation

empirical parameter modeling subgate depletion region slope from

source to drain (δ → 0 as γ → 0)

µ0 = empirical parameter representing the low-field effective/surface mobility (in the absence of vertical field degradation) δ = empirical parameter to model the fact that the depletion region is not uniform in depth from source to drain as the Square-Law model assumes θ = empirical parameter to model the amount by which the vertical field (VGS - VT’) degrades the surface mobility θB = empirical parameter to model the effect of back bias VBS (substrate bias wrt. source) on mobility (typically on the order of 0.01V-1)εsat = critical source-drain electric field for velocity saturationVT’(L,Z,VDS) = threshold voltage adjusted for DIBL and channel length and width effects: VT’(L,Z,VDS) = VT - ∆VT(L,VDS) + ∆VT(Z)VDS(SAT) = the saturation voltage of the transistor (due to pinchoff or velocity saturation)

[ ]

++−+

∆−

+−−

=

sat

DSBSBDSTGS

DSDSDSTGSOX

D

LSATVVVZLVV

LL

SATVSATVVZLVVLZC

SATI

εθθ

δµ

)(1),,('11

)()1(21)()],,('['

)(

20

models saturation ID-VDS slope, due to channel length modulation

(∆L is a function of VDS)

saturation voltage

for VDS < VDS(SAT)

for VDS ≥ VDS(SAT)

Source: Y.P. Tsividis, Operation and Modeling of the MOS Transistor, McGraw-Hill, 1987.

Page 315: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 86Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

The Square-Law model can be modified with terms which approximate small-geometry effects, as well as some other non-idealities which affect both large and small MOSFETs. This approach represents a compromise between intuitiveness and accuracy: we retain the simplicity and intuitiveness of the Square-Law equation, but add in terms (containing empirical variables) that adjust the ID-VDS relationship to account for these various effects. The typical alternative is to have highly empirical formulas, usually very narrow in applicability (e.g. to transistors of a specific fab process) and not offering much intuitiveness (e.g. numerical solution algorithms and curve fitting), that give very accurate results for the intended application. Note that this modified Square-Law approach only works if each effect is small when considered individually, such that any interactions among these effects are negligible.

Linear Region

• Threshold Voltage Modifications: VT is reduced from its ideal large-geometry value by DIBL (VDS lowers the source barrier, hence VT decreases with increasing VDS). VT also decreases with decreasing L (because the gate really only has to compensate the subgate depletion charge in the trapezoidal region discussed earlier). However, VT increases with decreasing Z due to the fringing electric field along the width of the gate -- this fringing field makes the depletion region extend somewhat wider than Z (the width of the gate electrode), hence there is more depletion volume that must be compensated by the gate and VT is higher (in magnitude). For large Z this effect is negligible because the fringing depletion region is an insignificant fraction of the total gate width, but for small Z it is not negligible and VT increases as the width narrows. If each of these three effects is small when considered individually, we can neglect any interaction terms and say that VT’(L,Z,VDS)= VT - ∆VT(L,VDS) + ∆VT(Z), where the first term on the right is the ideal large-geometry threshold voltage, the middle term subtracts from this some delta due to DIBL and L, and the last term addsto this some delta due to Z. The values of the ∆VT terms are usually determined semi-empirically for a particular process technology (theoretical treatments can be found in: Y.P. Tsividis, Operation and Modeling of the MOS Transistor, McGraw-Hill, 1987, chapter 5). The change in VT due to hot electron effects (accumulation of gate oxide trapped charge) can also be included here if the ∆VThot-e(t) is included for some particular time of interest in the transistor’s life.

• Velocity Saturation is modeled by the right-most term in the denominator. When VDS is much less than the velocity saturation voltage (Lεsat), this term reduces to 1 and velocity saturation is

ignored. If VDS approaches Lεsat this term reduces the drain current (i.e. without this term, ID would be over-estimated because saturation of carrier velocity would not be taken into account).

• Mobility Degradation due to the vertical electric field (as discussed earlier) is also modeled in the equation above. This portion of the equation contains empirical parameters that depend on the transistor design and process technology. θ is an empirical parameter that dictates how much the mobility is reduced by the vertical field (VGS - VT’ ). The empirical parameter θB models the effect of back bias (substrate bias wrt. the source, VBS) on the mobility; it is small (on the order of 0.01 V-1) and is often omitted -- but doing so gives the erroneous result that the effective mobility increases with increasing magnitude of VBS (because VT increases with VBS as discussed earlier, reducing the denominator) when, intuitively, the mobility will decrease because the back bias adds to the vertical electric field strength. (Note: Keep in mind that vertical-field mobility degradation is observed in both large- and small-geometry FETs).

• The term 1+δ is an empirical factor which models the fact that the subgate depletion depth (charge) increases from source to drain, as previously discussed. This is not taken into account in the Square-Law Theory (upon which the above equation is based), so this term is intended to correct for that. δ → 0 as γ → 0 (i.e. as tOX and NA are reduced), which is the case where the source-to-drain depletion depth is approximately uniform and the accuracy of the Square-Law model improves (e.g. see previous discussion of Square-Law model vs. Bulk-Charge model). (Note: This applies to both large- and small-geometry FETs).

Saturation Region

The equation for the saturation region is similar to that for the linear region, but with two key differences:

• Channel Length Modulation is taken into account by the left-most term in the denominator, where ∆L is a function of VDS that must be characterized for a particular transistor design / process technology (see Tsividis, chapter 5, for a theoretical treatment). As VDS increases in saturation, ∆L becomes a larger fraction of L, hence 1 - ∆L/L decreases and ID increases with VDS, as expected (i.e. positive ID-VDS slope in saturation). (For a large-geometry MOSFET, ∆L is a tiny fraction of L for any practical VDS, so 1 - ∆L/L ≈ 1 and channel length modulation is ignored.)

• VDS is replaced by VDS(SAT), the transistor saturation voltage (which may be due to channel pinch-off or velocity saturation, as previously discussed - the interested reader is referred to Tsividis, chapter 5, for additional details). Note that VDS for the VT’ terms is not replaced by VDS(SAT), because DIBL continues even beyond saturation, i.e. the drain field continues to directly influence the source even for VDS > VDS(SAT).

Page 316: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 87Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Appendix: The CMOS Fabrication Process

Si

P Well N Well

Isolation

Poly-Si Gate

N+ Source/Drain P+ Source/Drain

Gate OxideN+ Poly-Si P+ Poly-Si

(a) (b)

(c)(d)

Page 317: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 88Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

This is a very basic illustration of a highly simplified CMOS process flow, to illustrate how integrated circuits (ICs) are manufactured. This course is not about silicon processing per se; this material is included as a primer for those with little or no knowledge of standard CMOS fabrication processes, to give them a basic understanding of how transistors are made, and help them integrate some of the concepts in this module and the next.

(a) Shown in step (a) is a very small portion of the bare silicon start wafer, just big enough for two transistors. There may be millions of transistors on a single chip (aka. die), and perhaps hundreds of chips on a single silicon wafer (typically 4 - 12 inches in diameter), so this is indeed a tiny volume of the wafer we are illustrating here. What takes place in these diagrams should be visualized as taking place over the entire wafer surface, fabricating millions of transistors simultaneously. The start silicon wafer is supplied by a vendor, and the surface typically contains a thin (few microns) layer of P-type epitaxial silicon (aka. epi) in which the transistors will be built. The crystal structure and doping of the epi are precisely controlled, unlike the bulk of the Si wafer (a few hundred microns thick) which is mainly for mechanical support.

(b) Isolation trenches are etched in the silicon, defining which areas of the wafer surface will be “active” (i.e. where the transistors will be) and which are “isolation” (i.e. containing SiO2 to electrically isolate neighboring transistors). This pattern is defined on the wafer surface by a process called photolithography (in this case, using the isolation photomask), and the trench etch is performed with a plasma etch tool. The trenches are overfilled with SiO2 by a chemical vapor deposition (CVD) technique, and the SiO2 is then polished back flush with the wafer surface, a process called planarization or chemical-mechanical polish (CMP). Next, the N-well and P-well regions are doped using a process called ion implantation, whereby the wafer is bombarded with high-energy dopant ions (e.g. phosphorous or arsenic for N-type, boron for P-type) that become imbedded in the wafer surface. Photolithography is used to cover the N-well regions with photoresist during the P-well implant, and visa versa. Notice that all of the processes are “blanket” processes, i.e. thin film depositions, photolithography, etches, ion implants, and planarization are performed globally over the entire surface of the wafer.

(c) Later in the process, the gate oxide is made on the wafer surface by a process called thermal oxidation, which takes place in a diffusion furnace. The gate oxide is very thin (tOX ~101 - 102 Å) and must be of extremely high quality and purity for good MOSFET performance and reliability. Next, a layer of poly-Si is deposited on the wafer surface by CVD, and the poly-Si pattern is defined by photolithography (using the poly/gate photomask) and then etched. This step defines the gate length (L). Notice that the techniques involved in the fabrication process are “subtractive” in nature, i.e. a blanket layer is applied to the wafer, and then material is removed (subtracted) to leave behind the desired pattern.

(d) The source and drain regions are made by ion implantation (the N-channel devices are covered by photoresist for the P-type source/drain implant, and visa versa). Notice the self-aligned gate process discussed earlier: the poly-Si gate electrode is doped at the same time the source and drain are doped, and the poly-Si shields the subgate region from the implant such that the source and drain are “self” aligned to the gate edges. A high-temperature anneal step typically follows an implant, to heal the damage the implant did to the Si surface, drive (diffuse) the doped regions to the desired depth/dimensions, and electrically activate the dopant. This may be done in a diffusion furnace, or a rapid thermal anneal (RTA) tool (which rapidly ramps up to and down from the desired temperature, to minimize the amount of dopant diffusion, allowing for smaller and denser features).

Page 318: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 89Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

Appendix: The CMOS Fabrication Process (cont.)

MetalInterconnect

Lines(first layer)

P-Channel MOSFET

N-Channel MOSFET

(e)

(f)

Contacts / Vias(first layer)

InterlayerDielectric (ILD)

Repeat for subsequent

metal/via layers

Page 319: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

4 - 90Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / MOSFET / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham

(e) A layer of SiO2 called interlayer dielectric (ILD) is deposited over the wafer surface by CVD and polished/planarized. The contact holes are defined by photolithography (using the contact photomask) and etched. A metal such as tungsten is deposited over the wafer surface by CVD, filling in the contact holes. The tungsten is then etched or polished back to leave tungsten only in the contacts.

(f) The first layer of metal interconnect lines (traces) is built next. Historically these metal lines have been made of aluminum, but more modern CMOS processes use copper instead. For aluminum interconnects, a layer of aluminum is blanket deposited over the wafer surface by a technique called sputteringor physical vapor deposition (PVD), and the metal lines are then patterned by photolithography (using the metal-1 photomask) and etched. For copper interconnects, trenches are patterned and etched into the ILD, these trenches are overfilled with electroplated copper, and the copper is then etched or polished back leaving copper only inside the trenches (metal lines). This technique of filling etched features with metal is called a damascene process; if the vias and contacts are filled at the same time it is called dual damascene. The trenches must be lined with a copper diffusion barrier such as tantalum to prevent any copper from reaching and contaminating the transistors. Copper is preferred over aluminum because it has a much lower resistance, and is less susceptible to electromigration (a phenomenon that can cause voids to develop in the metal lines over time, posing a reliability threat). In a modern IC fabrication process there are several layers of metal interconnected vertically by vias (the only difference between vias and contacts is that contacts touch the silicon surface), and these are fabricated by repeating steps (e) and (f) for each layer. A layer called passivation is deposited over the top metal layer, providing a hermetic seal. The passivation is patterned and etched, and solder bumps are electroplated; these bumps connect the top metal lines to the traces/balls of the package in the flip-chip or C4 (Controlled Collapsed Chip Connection) assembly process.

To reiterate, this is a highly simplified illustration showing the major milestones in a generic CMOS process. More sophisticated features such as specialized implants (e.g. tips, VT adjust, etc.), spacers, salicide, adhesion layers, hardmasks and anti-reflective coatings, etc., have been omitted for simplicity. Other courses address silicon processing in much greater detail.

Page 320: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 1

5Small But Important

Transistor Circuits

Page 321: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 2

This is the last module in a five-module introduction to semiconductor devices. The modules are:

1. Electronic Properties of Silicon

2. The PN Junction

3. The MOS Capacitor

4. The MOSFET

5. Small Circuits

The goal of this module is to present the “big picture” surrounding all this device physics, i.e. to explain why we want to make transistors in the first place, and how a bunch of “microscopic switches” can be used to make useful chips such as logic gates and memory cells. We will also see how these can be used to make larger, more sophisticated circuits, like a microprocessor. We will obtain a high-level, big-picture understanding of how a chip is born – from design to manufacture and test. And we will study the motivations, methodologies, and technical challenges associated with shrinking (scaling) the MOSFET and advancing the state of semiconductor technology from one generation to the next.

Objectives of this module:

• Explain what CMOS means

• Study a few basic CMOS logic gates: inverter, AND, NAND, OR, NOR

• Illustrate how these basic logic gates can be combined to make larger, more complex circuits

• Understand how semiconductor memory works in general, and build three basic memory cells: SRAM, DRAM, Flash EEPROM

• Provide a high-level overview of how a chip is born – from design and layout to manufacture and test

• Study the methodologies and technical challenges involved in shrinking (scaling) transistors and advancing the state of semiconductor technology

• Provide a brief overview of the history of Intel® microprocessors and Moore’s Law

Looking Back: We are prepared to understand CMOS transistor circuits because we understand how N-channel and P-channel MOSFETs work.

Page 322: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 3

Transistors are used to build:Logic Memory

o

••

+Vcc

o

• •

• •

• •

b b

word line

A

B

C

+Vcc

o

o

(example: SRAM cell)(example: NOR gate)

(example: Pentium® 4 microprocessor)

Transistors - So What?

Page 323: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 4

Transistors can be used to build logic circuits and memory circuits. Logic circuits manipulate and transform data (bits), performing logical operations (e.g. comparing pieces of data, encoding and decoding data, etc.) and arithmetic functions (e.g. addition, multiplication, etc.). Memory circuits store information (bits) for future use. A typical chip will contain both logic and memory.

We will use transistors to build the following logic circuits:

• Inverter

• AND & NAND gates

• OR & NOR gates

• A simple control circuit

• A simple decoder

And we will study the following memory circuits:

• SRAM cell

• DRAM cell

• Flash EEPROM cell

Page 324: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 5

CMOS

Complimentary Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor

GS D

P

•••

N+ N+

N

•••

P+ P+

GS D• B •B

Page 325: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 6

CMOS stands for Complimentary Metal-Oxide-Semiconductor. When N-Channel and P-Channel MOSFETs are fabricated together on the same chip, the chip or circuit is called CMOS. The term “complimentary” refers to the fact that N-channel and P-channel transistors are turned on by opposite polarities of gate voltage.

Note that CMOS processing requires the fabrication of N-type and/or P-type wells (aka. tubs) in the silicon substrate. In an N-well process, N-type wells are created in a P-type substrate. The P-channel transistors are then fabricated inside these N-well regions, while the N-channel transistors are fabricated outside the wells in the P-type substrate. In a twin-well or twin-tub CMOS process, both N-wells and P-wells are created in the substrate. N-channel transistors are then fabricated in the P-wells, and P-channel transistors in the N-wells.

As we will see later, the complimentary behavior allows CMOS circuits to exhibit much lower power consumption than NMOS circuits (i.e. all N-Channel transistors) or PMOS circuits (i.e. all P-Channel transistors). For this reason, CMOS circuits are the technology of choice for most modern, large-scale digital circuits.

Page 326: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 7

Logic Circuits

Page 327: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 8

Transistors can be interconnected into circuits that perform logical operations (such as control circuits) and arithmetic operations (such as binary mathematics). For example, a microprocessor contains circuitry that performs a wide variety of logical and mathematical functions. In general, the more transistors a chip contains, the “smarter” it is.

The purpose of this section is to examine a few basic logic circuits for illustration.

Page 328: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 9

CMOS Inverter

o

••

+Vcc

Vin Vout

+Vcc(logic 1)

0 V(logic 0)

0 V(logic 0)

+Vcc(logic 1)

VoutVin

Vout

Vin

+Vcc

0 V

current

logic circuit symbol

transistor circuit

truth table

transfer function

• Vout

+Vcc

• Vout

+Vcc

Vin Vouto

GS D

P

•••

N+ N+

N

•••

P+ P+

G SD

••

•••

+ VccVin Vout

Pdynamic = CVcc2ftog = CVcc

2KDfclk

βn

βp

Page 329: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 10

A logic gate is a small number of transistors interconnected to perform some elementary logic operation. There are many different kinds of logic gates, performing various functions. Digital logic circuits can then be constructed from these basic logic gates. We will look at a few logic gates to understand how they work. The inverter is the simplest logic gate. It takes a bit (a binary digit, i.e. a 0 or 1) as input, and returns the opposite bit as output. In this sense, it performs the logical “not” function: if the input is a 1, the output is “not 1” or 0 (and visa versa). This functionality is summarized in the truth table. A logic 1 denotes a high voltage, typically the supply voltage (+Vcc). Logic 0 means a low voltage, such as ground (0 volts). As previously discussed, transistors behave like microscopic switches in digital electronics. Because transistors are on or off, digital circuits work in binary logic, i.e. the language of 0’s and 1’s. It is important to note that the output of the inverter does not change instantly in response to a change in the input; because it takes time for the transistors to switch, and for the output terminal (load) to charge/discharge, there is some “gate delay” or propagation delay through the inverter (typically on the order of picoseconds or nanoseconds, depending on the transistor technology and the circuit details).

CMOS Power Considerations:

Notice that the CMOS inverter consumes power (i.e. draws current) only during the brief transient period while it is switching between logic states (0 ↔ 1). This is the advantage of CMOS circuits over other types of circuits (e.g. NMOS, TTL, etc.) - very low power. Power can be broken down into two components: static power (power consumed when the circuit is not switching, dc component) and dynamic power (power consumed due to switching, ac component). Their sum is the total power. In CMOS circuits, static power arises mainly from off-state transistor leakage (e.g. subthreshold leakage, junction leakage, and gate leakage), and hence increases as the transistor density increases, and of course gets worse for smaller channel lengths as discussed in module 4.

Dynamic power is consumed by switching nodes in the circuit, and arises from two current components: the overlap current and the charge/discharge current. During the act of switching, when one transistor is in the process of turning off and the other is in the process of turning on, there is a very brief period of time during which both transistors are on and a conductive path exists from Vccto ground - the relatively small current that flows from Vcc to ground during this brief transient period is the overlap current. Note also that supply current must be delivered to the output node (through the P-channel transistor) to charge the node up to Vcc when it makes a 0 → 1 transition. Similarly, charge must be removed from the output node (through the N-channel transistor) to pull it down to ground when it makes a 1 → 0 transition. This is the charge/discharge current. Typically, the overlap current is negligible compared to the charge/discharge current. Note that it is often desirable for the transistors to have equal gain (βn = βp) so that the inverter has equal current source and sink capabilities (i.e. equal times for 0 → 1 and 1 → 0 output transitions). This is usually achieved by making the width (Z) of the P-channel transistor ~2.5 times larger than that of the N-channel transistor (to compensate for the fact that the effective hole mobility is ~2.5 times smaller than the effective electron mobility.) The βn/βp (i.e Zn/Zp) ratio determines the position of the edge (“cliff”) in the transfer function (higher βn/βp moves it left).

Dynamic power increases with increasing clock frequency (at a higher clock rate there is more switching of logic gates per unit time, and hence more power is consumed). A straightforward circuit analysis reveals that the dynamic power of a CMOS circuit is given by: P = CVcc

2ftog = CVcc2KDfclk, where C is the total output capacitance being driven, Vcc is the supply voltage, and ftog is the toggle

frequency of the node in question, often expressed as some duty (toggle) factor KD times the clock frequency fclk. (E.g. for positive-edge triggered sequential logic, the worst possible case is a logic node that toggles on every rising clock edge, hence going through a full cycle of its own (e.g. 0 → 1 → 0) every two clock cycles, thus KD = 0.5.) Note that the dynamic power dissipation increases linearly with clock frequency, duty factor, and capacitance, and quadratically with supply voltage. In high-speed circuits, such as a microprocessor, the dynamic power (at operating clock frequency) is typically orders of magnitude larger than the static power component.

Low power is important in mobile electronics, because it means increased battery life. It is also important in non-mobile applications because it means the chip runs cooler. The maximum transistor density and maximum clock frequency of a high-speed circuit are often limited by the ability of a cooling system to remove heat from the chip. Also, charge leaks off dynamic nodes much faster at higher temperatures, so minimum refresh times (e.g. for DRAM) are limited by thermal considerations as well. Thermal dissipation is an important consideration in chip design and packaging.

* Note the gray backside/well contacts in the transistor circuit. Specifically, note that the backside of the N-channel transistor is strapped to ground, while the backside of the P-channel transistor is tied to +Vcc (these backside connections are often omitted or “implied” in circuit diagrams). This is why the P-channel transistor is turned on with 0 volts applied to its gate: the voltage drop across the gate is Vcc and its polarity is such as to cause inversion. (This is equivalent to applying a negative voltage VGS with the backside grounded, as we described the operation of a P-channel MOSFET earlier.) Note also that the PN junction formed by the wells (underneath the isolation oxide) is reverse biased and thus “self-isolating”.

Page 330: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 11

CMOS Inverter - LayoutP-channeltransistor

N-channeltransistor

poly-Si (gates) Vcc gnd

metal-1

via / contact

P source/drain (aka. diffusion)

N-well

N source/drain (aka. diffusion) source: Principles of CMOS VLSI Design, Weste & Eshraghian, 1993, AT&T.

Page 331: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 12

This is a circuit layout or cell layout for a CMOS inverter (in an N-well CMOS process). It is a top view, showing the layout of thevarious regions and components of this logic gate.

There are design rules governing the layout. Considering poly-Si for example, there are design rules specifying the minimum polyline width, minimum pitch (spacing) between poly lines, minimum poly-to-contact distance, etc. The design rules come from the capabilities of the CMOS fabrication process, for example the critical dimension (CD) that can be resolved by the lithography and etch processes, the tolerance in aligning one litho layer to another, the thermal budget and the amount of lateral diffusion that takes place in the doped (implanted) regions, etc.

Page 332: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 13

Aside: Latchup

source: Principles of CMOS VLSI Design, Weste & Eshraghian, 1993, AT&T.

Page 333: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 14

We referred to the phenomenon of latchup in earlier modules.

Note that there are two parasitic Bipolar Junction Transistors (BJTs) inherent in the CMOS structure: a vertical PNP BJT formed by the P+ drain, N-well, and P-type substrate, and a horizontal NPN BJT formed by the N+ source, P-type substrate, and N-well.

We have discussed the BJT only briefly, in the exercise at the end of the PN junction module. Therefore, the physics of latchup will not be discussed in detail here. Rather, we will have a more general description.

Various non-idealities can trigger latchup in a CMOS circuit, such as noise, leakage current, transient current/voltage spikes, or radiation. Such an event can cause one of the parasitic BJTs to turn on (i.e. the emitter-base junction becomes forward biased). These BJTs are arranged such that when one turns on it is likely to turn the other one on. The parasitic circuit can operate with a gain > 1, meaning that the BJTs feed one another in a positive feedback loop. This results in a large parasitic current, effectively shorting the supply voltage (VDD in this diagram) and ground (VSS). Typically, this latchup current causes the device to self-destruct (the circuitry can not handle such a large sustained current). At the very least, it causes the circuit to become inoperable and “freeze” (hence the name “latchup”), requiring that it be powered down and reset. Due to the high substrate currents that accompany latchup, it is often the case that latchup in one CMOS transistor pair will spread to neighboring transistors, causing them to latchup as well.

Latchup Prevention: Latchup was an obstacle to the early adoption of CMOS technology. Modern circuit design/layout and silicon processing techniques make circuits much less susceptible to latchup. To avoid latchup, it is desirable to reduce the gain of the parasitic BJTs. One popular technique is to use silicon start wafers with an epitaxial (epi) layer on top of a heavily-doped substrate. This reduces Rsubstrate which reduces the gain and also provides a shunt path for collector current of the PNP BJT. Another popular technique (which can be combined with the previous one) is to use retrograde wells – i.e. the doping concentration at the bottom of the well is higher, reducing Rsubstrate, while the surface of the well is more lightly doped to preserve good MOSFET characteristics. There are also some very effective layout techniques for combating latchup, such as the copious use of substrate/well contacts; placing VSScontacts close to N+ source regions (to reduce Rsubstrate) and VDD contacts close to P+ source regions (to reduce Rwell); and the fabrication of guard rings in I/O structures, where latchup is most likely to occur (guard rings act as “dummy collectors” and reduce the gain of the parasitic BJTs).

Page 334: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 15

CMOS AND & NAND Gates

C = not (A and B) = A B•

C = A and B = A B•

=

AND Gatelogic 1 = + Vcclogic 0 = 0 volts

outputinputs

101

110

0

1

A

10

01

CBoutputinputs

101

110

0

1

A

10

01

CB

outputinputs

001

010

0

1

A

00

11

CB

outputinputs

001

010

0

1

A

00

11

CB

NAND Gate

o o

A

B

C

+Vcc

•A

BCo A

BCo

A

BC

Page 335: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 16

Transistors can be interconnected to make AND and NAND (“Not AND”) logic gates. (We will use 2-input gates for example, but these principles can be extended to gates with more inputs.)

An AND gate returns a logic 1 only when all of its inputs (in this case A and B) are logic 1; otherwise, its output is logic 0. Thus, the output bit can be calculated by multiplying the two input bits, as shown in the equation and the truth table. Another way to look at it is in Boolean terms, where each input is evaluated as true (1) or false (0), and the output is true only when A and B are true. This is the origin of the term “truth table”.

The NAND gate, as the name implies, always returns the opposite (compliment) of what an AND gate produces. This can be observed by comparing the two truth tables. The bar in the equation means to take the compliment of the expression underneath.

The transistor circuit for a NAND gate is shown. By treating the transistors as switches, similar to the inverter example discussed previously, we can see how this circuit generates the output shown in the truth table.

Again, note that this CMOS circuit conducts current between Vcc and ground only during the brief transient period while it is switching, and thus consumes very little power.

Page 336: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 17

CMOS NAND Gate – Layout

A

BC

(out)

P-channeltransistors

Vcc

N-channeltransistors

gnd

poly-Si (gates)

metal-1

via / contact

P source/drain (aka. diffusion)

N source/drain (aka. diffusion)

source: Introduction to VLSI Design,Eugene D. Fabricius. McGraw-Hill, 1990.

Page 337: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 18

This is a cell layout for a two-input CMOS NAND gate.

The color scheme has changed slightly from that used previously for the inverter layout, because this cell was created by a different layout tool. Also, the MOSFET and contact regions are highlighted, making them easier to identify.

Page 338: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 19

CMOS OR & NOR Gates

C = A or B = A + B

OR Gateoutputinputs

101

110

0

1

A

00

11

CB

outputinputs

101

110

0

1

A

00

11

CB

C = not (A or B) = A + B

outputinputs

001

010

0

1

A

10

01

CBoutputinputs

001

010

0

1

A

10

01

CB

NOR Gate

A

B

C

+Vcc

o

o

•=A

BCo oA

BC

A

BC

Page 339: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 20

Transistors can be interconnected to make OR and NOR (“Not OR”) logic gates.

An OR gate outputs a 1 whenever one or more of its inputs is 1. In this case, the output is 1 when A or B is 1. In Boolean terms, the output is true (1) when one or both of the inputs, A or B, is true.

The NOR gate, as the name implies, produces output that is opposite (complimentary) to the OR gate. The transistor circuit for a NOR gate is shown for example.

Page 340: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 21

CMOS NOR Gate - Layout

poly-Si (gates)

metal-1

via / contact

P source/drain (aka. diffusion)

N source/drain (aka. diffusion)

source: Introduction to VLSI Design,Eugene D. Fabricius. McGraw-Hill, 1990.

Page 341: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 22

NOR gate layout.

Page 342: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 23

Exercise: 3-Input NAND Gate

1. Draw the truth table for a 3-input NAND gate.

2. Draw the circuit symbol.

3. Draw the transistor-level circuit for a 3-input CMOS NAND gate. Hint: You will need three N-channel transistors and three P-channel transistors.

Page 343: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 24

Exercise

Page 344: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 25

Exercise: 3-Input NAND Gate - Solution

0111

1011

1101

1001

1110

1010

1100

1000

YCBA

ABC

Y

o o

+Vcc

o

A

B

C

Y

o

Page 345: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 26

Solution

Page 346: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 27

Example: A Simple Control Circuit

window isclosed ?

door isclosed ?

alarm system is armed ?

sound the alarm ?

Burglar alarm for a room with one window and one door

signal from a keypadcontrol panel

signal from contact sensor on door frame

signal from contact sensor on window frame

signal to an alarm horn or bell

o

o

Page 347: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 28

Other types of basic logic gates exist, besides the five we have studied here (inverter, AND, NAND, OR, NOR); we will not attempt to study them all. Our purpose here is simply to illustrate that transistors can be interconnected to make useful circuits, such as the simple control circuit shown here. It controls a burglar alarm for a room with one window and one door.

The system has three inputs. When an input is “true” or “yes”, it is a assigned a value of logic 1. When it is “false” or “no”, it is logic 0.

When the alarm is armed (alarm system is armed? = yes = 1) and both the window and door are closed (window is closed? = door is closed? = yes = 1), both AND gates produce output of 0 and hence the OR gate has output 0 and the alarm is not sounding (sound the alarm? = 0 = no).

If either the window or the door (or both) is opened while the alarm is armed, one (or both) of the AND gates will produce an output of 1. This will cause the OR gate to produce output of 1, triggering the alarm.

This is certainly not the best burglar alarm in the world! But it illustrates how the basic logic gates we have studied in this module can be used to create digital circuits that perform logical operations.

Note that any arithmetic operation is essentially a sequence of logic operations, hence logic circuits can be constructed to perform mathematical calculations as well. Of course, a digital circuit will perform all of these calculations in binary (0’s and 1’s). Any base-10 number can be represented as a binary number, including negative numbers and fractions. And any mathematical operation can be performed on these binary numbers (e.g. addition, subtraction, multiplication, division, etc.).

Page 348: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 29

Exercise: A Decoder

Using inverters and AND gates, construct a 2-bit decoder. The circuit has two 1-bit input lines and four 1-bit output lines. For a given combination of inputs, one (and only one) output line will be selected (logic 1) as indicated in the truth table below.

100011

010001

001010

000100

W3W2W1W0A1A0

inputs outputs

A0

A1

W0

W1

W2

W3

decoder

Page 349: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 30

This example will come in handy later when we discuss semiconductor memory.

(Aside: If you know how to count in binary, you will recognize this as a 2-bit binary-to-decimal decoder.)

Page 350: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 31

A0 A1

W0

W1

W2

W3

••

••

Exercise: A Decoder - Solution

••

o o

Page 351: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 32

Note that this can easily be extended to handle more than two inputs. For example, for three inputs (A0 – A2), we would use three inverters along with 23 = 8 AND gates, to decode all 23 = 8 possible combinations of the three inputs. Later, when we discuss semiconductor memory, we will see an example of an 8-bit memory address decoder, which can decode an 8-bit memory address and select one of 28 = 256 unique word lines (memory addresses).

Page 352: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 33

Levels of Abstractionfunctional blocks/units/modules

sub-blocks

logic gates

transistorcircuits

o

o o

ALU

MU

X

decoder

reg

reg

reg

Page 353: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 34

The simple control circuit for our burglar alarm is very small and easy to design. But what about much larger, more complex circuits, like a microprocessor containing millions of gates?

To make a large, complex circuit like a microprocessor, the circuit must be broken down into smaller blocks and sub-blocks, each of which can be designed by an individual or small team; these blocks are then reassembled to form the whole chip. CAD (Computer Aided Design) tools make the design process more efficient and robust.

There are different levels of abstraction when thinking about a circuit. The top level might be the entire system, e.g. the motherboard of a PC, containing many chips on a printed circuit board (not represented in the diagram). The next level of abstraction might be an individual chip, e.g. the microprocessor. The chip is divided into smaller functional blocks (aka. units or modules), some of which are logic circuits and some of which are memory circuits (discussed later). Examples of logic units on a typical microprocessor are things like the instruction fetch unit, the instruction decode unit, the integer unit/pipeline (performs mathematical operations on integers), the floating-point unit/pipeline (performs mathematical operations on decimal numbers), the branch prediction unit (handles program flow control), etc. Examples of memory units would include things like the caches (local on-chip memory banks) and the register files (banks of dedicated and/or general-purpose registers). There are some analog units as well, such as the I/O (input/output) units (which transport instructions/data to and from the chip) and the clock unit (which controls the clock signals for the chip).

Each of these functional units can be further deconstructed into a circuit of still lower-level elements. Logic units can be deconstructed into lower-level elements like multiplexers (MUX), adders, registers, counters, Arithmetic Logic Units (ALU), decoders, etc. Each of these, in turn, is made up of basic logic gates such as inverters, NAND gates, NOR gates, etc. And as we have already seen, each of these gates has a corresponding transistor-level circuit.

Large and complex circuits must be approached with this hierarchy of abstraction in mind. As we ascend the hierarchy, a kind of “information hiding” takes place, so that the design can be understood in progressively more general terms – more scope, less detail. Conversely, as we descend the hierarchy, we have less scope but more technical detail. It is important to work at the right level of abstraction for the task at hand. It is also important to manage the design project with this hierarchy in mind.

Page 354: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 35

The Big Picture: How A Chip Is Born

A

B

C

+Vcc

o

o

•logic design

cell set / custom circuit design

layout

photomask set

to mask shopFa

bP r

oces

s F l

ow

Assembly

E-Test

Sort

Class Test

start Si

finished wafer

chip

transistor

packagedchip

from

Si v

endo

r

to F

ab

o

Page 355: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 36

We are now in a good position to step back and view the big picture of how chips are born.

Design: As described previously, a very large circuit is typically broken up into smaller blocks and sub-blocks, each of which can be designed by an individual or small team, and these blocks are then reassembled to form the whole chip. There are three basic approaches to IC design: ASIC, full-custom, and semi-custom. In the ASIC (Application-Specific IC) design methodology, design engineers use computer-based design tools to create a gate-level logic circuit schematic (or equivalent description, e.g. a netlist) for the circuit to be built, like the schematic for our burglar alarm control circuit. This gate-level circuit will later be translated into a transistor-level circuit during Layout (see below). In a full-custom design, engineers use computer-based tools to design the circuit directly at the transistor level, rather than the logic gate level (i.e. no gate-to-transistor translation required). It is possible to gain better IC performance in this manner, but the trade-off is an increase in design resources and design time. Also note that any analog circuits on the chip (e.g. I/O circuits) are custom designs. The semi-custom design strategy balances the performance vs. design time/resources trade-off, by designing some parts of the circuit at the gate level (ASIC) and the more performance-critical parts at the transistor level (custom).

Verification: The circuit is simulated to verify that it meets functionality requirements and performance goals (speed, power, etc). To perform the functional verification, binary test vectors (aka. test patterns) are applied to the input pins in the design simulation, and the output vectors/patterns are compared to the expected results. Timing analysis tools verify that the circuit meets all setup/hold times, and help to identify the critical speed paths (bottlenecks) in the circuit. Reliability verification tools examine the circuit’s susceptibility to effects such as hot electrons, electromigration, etc.

Layout: For an ASIC design, the gate-level schematic is laid out at the transistor-level using the cell library for the target CMOS process. Cells are placed in the layout which correspond to the gates in the schematic. They are then interconnected with metal routing corresponding to the wires in the schematic. In this manner, the gate-level circuit schematic is translated into a transistor-level circuit laid out for silicon. For a full-custom design, or the custom portions of a semi-custom design, there is no gate-to-transistor translation required, so the transistor circuit can be laid out directly. In any case, computer-based layout tools help to automate the process and optimize the layout. Layout vs. Schematic (LVS) checks are performed to ensure that the layout corresponds exactly to the circuit schematic. Design Rule Check (DRC) is performed to ensure that the circuit adheres to the design rules for the target CMOS technology. Parasitic extraction tools examine the resistances and capacitances in the layout and calculate the associated delays in the circuitry; these are then fed back to the design engineers for further verification of the circuit timings, etc. The design-layout cycle is typically iterated several times before the chip meets all requirements.

Photomasks: The layout database is then “fractured” into layers so that a set of photomasks can be manufactured. For example, all poly-Si in the layout is captured for the poly mask, all metal-1 for the metal-1 mask, all N-well for the N-well mask, all contacts for the contact mask, etc. There is one mask for each layer. A photomask consists of a glass or quartz plate with a chrome pattern on its surface. For the metal-1 mask, for example, this chrome pattern is a replica of the metal-1 pattern in the layout database. (Other courses are available to explain the photomask manufacturing process.)

Fab, E-Test, and Sort: The mask set is then delivered to the Fab, where it will be used to manufacture the chips on silicon wafers. The fab is a cleanroom manufacturing environment, to minimize particulate defects which can jeopardize the yield and reliability of the chips. During the fabrication process, a technology called photolithography is used to transfer the mask pattern onto the wafer. The masks are applied to the wafer sequentially in a layer-upon-layer sequence to build the chips. (Other courses are available to explain the fabrication process in detail.) The end result is a wafer containing many chips, as shown above. The wafer is then sent to E-Test, where test structures in the scribelines (i.e. the dicing lanes between chips) are tested to evaluate the integrity of the fabrication process. These test structures consist of discrete transistors, PN junction diodes, and MOS capacitors in various shapes and sizes; test structures for metal lines and contacts/vias; and other structures. Parameters such as threshold voltage, effective channel length, drive current, subthreshold leakage current, junction breakdown voltage, and metal/contact/via resistances are measured. E-Test data provides valuable insight into the fabrication process itself, and the yield, performance, and reliability of the chips. After E-Test, the wafers are sent to Sort, where the chips themselves are probed to test their functionality, speed, and parametrics. For functional testing, the test hardware feeds the chip the same input test vectors/patterns that the designers used to simulate the chip. Any chips that do not meet functionality or performance requirements are identified in the Sort database.

Assembly, Burn-In, and Class Test: The chips are cut (diced) from the wafers, and all functional chips (as identified at Sort) are mounted into ceramic or plastic packages; this process is called packaging or assembly. The package protects the chip from the environment, and contains metal pins/balls which carry signals between the chip and the outside world. Some or all of the chips may undergo high-temperature, high-voltage stress testing to ensure good reliability; this is called Burn-In. Class test is the final test for the packaged chips, and uses a test program similar to that used at Sort. Class testing is usually performed under the worst-case operating conditions of the chip’s spec (e.g. maximum temperature and minimum supply voltage).

Validation: When a new chip is manufactured for the first time, prototype samples are evaluated in system-level or board-level testing. The goal is to identify any bugs or marginalities in the chip in its application environment. Critical speed paths (bottlenecks) may also be identified. This information is fed back to design for improvement, which will typically necessitate circuit modifications and hence some new photomasks. Several design-manufacture-test-validate cycles may be required before a chip is customer worthy.

This is how a chip gets from design to silicon. This is meant to be a big-picture overview; each of these topics could be discussed in much greater detail.

Page 356: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 37

Memory

Page 357: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 38

Transistors can also be interconnected to form circuits that store bits. In this section, we will study three types of memory: DRAM, SRAM, and Flash EEPROM. Each of these is widely used in a variety of microelectronic devices, including personal computers and mobile / handheld devices.

Page 358: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 39

Memory Storage & Access – The Big Picture

Add

ress

Dec

oder

A0

A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

W0

W1

W255

BITCELL•

•BIT

CELL••

BITCELL••

BITCELL••

BITCELL••

BITCELL•

•BIT

CELL••

BITCELL•

BITCELL•

•BIT

CELL••

BITCELL••

BITCELL••

BITCELL••

BITCELL•

•BIT

CELL••

BITCELL•

0••

0••

0••

1••

0••

0••

1••

1••

• • • • • • •

0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1

Sense/Write Sense/Write Sense/Write Sense/Write Sense/Write Sense/Write Sense/Write Sense/Write R / W

address lines(8-bit address = 28 = 256 unique addresses)

word lines (256)

I/O data lines(8 bits = 1 byte) read / write sense

amp circuitry

this address (word line) is selected

these cells are read from / written to (in parallel)

memory array(each cell stores 1 bit)

data / bit lines

Page 359: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 40

In addition to logic, transistors can also be used to make memory. Logic manipulates and transforms data, whereas memory stores data for future use. Each plays a vital role in modern microelectronics; for example, a microprocessor contains large amounts of both.

Before discussing different types of memory, let’s understand how a semiconductor memory works in general. We will use the simple memory scheme shown here for illustration.

A memory is an array of memory cells, each of which stores one bit. Each cell is a transistor circuit. (Later, we will study three memory cells: the DRAM cell, the SRAM cell, and the Flash EEPROM cell.)

Reading a byte from memory:

A binary address is placed on the address lines; in this example, an 8-bit address is used and hence there are 8 address lines A0 – A7 . The address decoder is an 8-bit decoder (analogous to the 2-bit decoder we designed earlier as an exercise). It accepts the binary address as input and selects the appropriate output line or word line. Note that, with 8 bits (one byte), it is possible to specify 28 = 256 unique addresses (i.e. 256 word lines).

A voltage is placed on the selected word line, thus accessing each cell in that line simultaneously. In this example, there are 8 cells on each word line. Each cell then places the bit it is storing (a 0 or 1) on its bit line (aka. data line). A sense amp (a.k.a. read/write circuit) is used to sense and amplify the bit so it can be used by the outside world. Note that all 8 bits are read out simultaneously, as one byte (a.k.a. one “word”). Note also that the bit lines are shared among word lines, but only one word line will be active at any given time, and only those cells will use the bit lines.

Storing (writing) a byte into memory:

The byte to be stored is placed on the bit lines. These bits are sensed and amplified by the sense amps. The address to which the byte should be stored is placed on the address lines, and the address decoder selects the corresponding word line. This activates the memory cells on that word line (only), and they accept and store the bits present on the bit lines.

How the cell stores a bit will be explained next; it depends on what kind of cell is being used. We will study three types of memory cells: a DRAM cell, an SRAM cell, and a Flash EEPROM cell.

Page 360: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 41

DRAM Cell

word line

bit line

storagecapacitor

accesstransistor

this row addressis selected

0 0 1 0 0 1 10

charge chargechargenocharge

nocharge

nocharge

nocharge

nochargethis byte

is read orwritten

word line

bit line

storagecapacitor

accesstransistor

• •

Page 361: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 42

First we will study DRAM, or Dynamic Random Access Memory. “Dynamic” refers to the fact that DRAM memory must be periodically “refreshed” or it will lose the data it is storing. “Random access” refers to the fact that the word lines do not have to be accessed in any particular order; any byte or “word” can be independently accessed when needed by supplying its address.

DRAM is used in personal computers as the Main Memory, storing the operating system, programs, and other important information.

The basic DRAM cell is quite simple, consisting of an access transistor and a storage capacitor. The capacitor stores the bit (charged = 1, no charge = 0).

Reading from DRAM: Notice that the transistor gates are connected to the word line (N-channel transistors are used here). The address from which data is to be read is placed on the address lines, causing the address decoder to activate the appropriate word line. The transistors in the selected word line are turned on (i.e. the switches are closed), and the storage capacitors are electrically connected to their respective bit lines. If there is charge on the capacitor, it will be sensed on the bit line and amplified by the sense amp circuit; this will be interpreted as a the cell storing a 1. If there is no charge on the capacitor, the sense amp circuitry will interpret this as storing a 0.

Storing (writing) into DRAM: The byte to be stored is placed on the bit lines. The address into which this byte is to be stored is placed on the address lines, which causes the address decoder to activate the corresponding word line. This turns on the access transistors in this line, thus connecting the storage capacitors to their respective bit lines. If there is charge on a bit line (i.e. an input bit of 1), it will charge the capacitor. The capacitor retains the charge when the word line is deactivated, thus storing the 1. If there is no charge on the bit line (i.e. an input bit of 0), the capacitor will not be charged (or will be discharged), and thus stores the 0. Note that, for a non-ideal capacitor, stored charge will leak away over time. A typical storage capacitor can retain its charge for about 10 milliseconds. Therefore, each word line must be “refreshed” (i.e. the bits are read and then re-written) every few milliseconds to prevent the data from being lost.

Note that DRAM is volatile memory, meaning that it stores its data (bits) as long as supply power is provided. If supply power is disconnected from the DRAM, the data is lost.

Page 362: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 43

DRAM Cell – Trench Capacitor

Planar Capacitor

Trench Capacitor

P

••source

(bit line)gate

(word line)

N+ N+MOS

capacitor

ILD

•plate bias

P

••source

(bit line)gate

(word line)

N+ poly-Si

trench oxide

MOScapacitor

ILD

N+

•plate bias

Page 363: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 44

A popular design of the DRAM cell uses a trench capacitor. A deep, narrow trench is etched into the silicon. The sidewalls of this trench are oxidized (forming the dielectric for the capacitor) and then the trench is filled with poly-Si to form the other “plate” of the capacitor.

The primary advantage of this design is that it uses less silicon surface area than the planar capacitor. This allows for a denser DRAM, storing more bits per unit area. This means the DRAM chip can be smaller (more die per wafer), for improved yield and lower manufacturing cost. The main tradeoff is manufacturing complexity – there can be many technical challenges in the trench fabrication module, especially as the trend continues toward narrower and deeper trenches (higher aspect ratio) and more stringent charge storage requirements.

Aside – Some Technical Details: In a real DRAM cell, the “plate bias” is usually held at some positive supply voltage (VDD), contrary to the previous schematic in which it is shown going to ground. This biases the capacitor into inversion; i.e. a depletion region exists in the substrate and an inversion layer of electrons is present at the oxide interface. Whether the capacitor stores a 0 or a 1 is then determined by the sense amp circuitry according to whether (and how much) charge flows into or out of the storagecapacitor when it is accessed. This level of technical detail is beyond the scope of this course; our purpose here is simply todemonstrate that a DRAM cell stores a bit in the form of charge on a storage capacitor, and that different strategies exist for capacitor fabrication (e.g. planar vs. trench).

Page 364: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 45

SRAM Cell

o

••

+Vcc

o

• •

• •

• •

b b’

word line

storing a 1 storing a 0

accesstransistor

accesstransistor

inverterinverter

bit line

• •

b’b

0 011 oo• •

b’b

1 100 oo

Page 365: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 46

SRAM stands for Static Random Access Memory. “Static” refers to the fact that the memory does not have to be periodically refreshed like DRAM does; the SRAM cell will store the bit without refreshing.

The SRAM cell consists of two cross-coupled inverters; i.e. the output of one is the input of the other, in a static feedback loop. The SRAM cell is sometimes referred to as a “bi-stable” memory element, meaning that it has two static or stable states, corresponding to the storage of a 0 or a 1 as shown. It is a “regenerative” circuit, because the internal connections to power and ground ensure that the stored bit remains a “strong” 1 or 0 (i.e. the voltage level accessible to the bit line is held at full-scale Vcc or ground and does not weaken or drift over time). This is why the SRAM cell does not require periodic refreshing like the DRAM cell does.

It does, however, require supply power - SRAM, like DRAM, is volatile memory. If the supply power is removed, the regenerative feedback will stop and the data will be lost.

There are two access transistors, which act like switches connecting the cross-coupled inverter pair to the bit line b and also to a “not bit” line b’ (which is always the opposite, or compliment, of b). When the word line is activated, the two access transistors are turned on (switches closed), and the value stored by the inverter pair is accessible to the bit lines. Sense amps (not shown here) then read these signals and present them to the outside world.

This 6-transistor design is known as the “6T” SRAM cell. It is very popular, due mostly to its storage stability, but other SRAM cell designs exist as well. All of them involve some sort of static, regenerative feedback.

The primary advantage of SRAM over DRAM is speed - data can be retrieved from SRAM much faster than from DRAM in general, because it is easier to read the bit value stored in an SRAM cell than it is to read the small charge stored on a DRAM capacitor, and because DRAM read/write operations must be intermixed with the continuous refresh operations.

The main advantage of DRAM is its smaller cell size - one transistor and a trench capacitor, vs. the six transistors required for an SRAM cell. Therefore, much higher density can be achieved with DRAM, and hence much lower cost per byte.

Therefore, SRAM tends to be used for fast (and expensive) memories with smaller storage capacity, such as the cache in a microprocessor. DRAM tends to be used for slower (and much cheaper) memories with much greater storage volume, like the main memory of a PC.

Page 366: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 47

SRAM Cell - Layout

poly-Si (gates)

metal-1

via / contact

P source/drain (aka. diffusion)

N-well

N source/drain (aka. diffusion)

inverterinverter

accesstransistors

source: Principles of CMOS VLSI Design, Weste & Eshraghian, 1993, AT&T.

Page 367: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 48

Layout for a “6T” (6-Transistor) SRAM cell (in an N-well CMOS process). (The supply voltage in this diagram is called VDD and ground is called Vss .)

Page 368: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 49

Flash EEPROM Cell

Program Erase ReadGate (V) 12 -10 5

Source (V) 0 5 0Drain (V) 5 Float 1

0

1

Vt

Level 0

Level 1

ConventionalFlash Cell

10

11

Vt

Level 1

Level 0

00

01 Level 2

Level 3

StrataFlashTM

Cell (2 bit/cell)

Page 369: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 50

EEPROM stands for “Electrically-Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory”. “Read Only” is misleading - EEPROM can be programmed (i.e. written to) and re-programmed (i.e. erased and re-written) as needed; however, it can not be programmed as fast as SRAM or DRAM, and is intended for applications that require less frequent re-programming / writing. “Electrically-Erasable” means that voltage can be applied to erase the memory (whereas early EPROM chips were erased by exposing them to heat and UV light, which was very slow and inconvenient). “Flash” refers to an EEPROM device structure that allows the cell to be read, programmed, and erased much faster than earlier EEPROM cells.

Note that the cell is based on the MOSFET device structure, but has two poly-Si layers in the gate. The thin “tunnel oxide” is basically the gate oxide we discussed previously. The ONO (oxide-nitride-oxide) is new to us, and is there to facilitate the trapping and storage of charge on the floating poly-1 gate.

Programming the Flash Cell: A high voltage is applied to the gate. A circuit called the Write State Machine (WSM) (not shown) pulses the drain voltage. Channel Hot Electron (CHE) injection takes place, trapping electrons in the poly-1 gate (floating gate). This increases the threshold voltage (VT), which in turn will decrease the drive current, ID(SAT). A logic bit 0 has been programmed/written/stored in the cell. A good Flash cell will hold this charge almost indefinitely (i.e. a miniscule amount of charge leakage). Hence, Flash EEPROM memory is non-volatile, i.e. it retains its data without supply power. This is useful for mobile and handheld electronic devices.

Reading the Flash Cell: The word line selects a row of cells, applying voltage to their gates. The applied drain voltage biases the transistor-like cells into saturation, and each cell’s ID(SAT) is present on its bit line. Sense amp circuitry (not shown) compares the ID(SAT) of each cell to a reference cell to determine the bit (0 or 1) stored in each cell. Note that reading a cell does not erase or alter its data (i.e. does not disturb the trapped charge).

Erasing the Flash Cell: A large negative voltage is applied to the gate of all cells to be erased (usually an entire “block”). The WSM pulses a positive voltage onto the source lines, causing trapped electrons in the poly-1 gate to tunnel through the tunnel (gate) oxide and into the source. The WSM uses a reference cell to determine when the cells have been fully discharged (i.e. all are logic bit 1).

Note that the Flash cells are always N-channel devices; the higher mobility of electrons (vs. holes) is conducive to CHE injection. However, while the Flash memory cell array is NMOS, the periphery of the chip is CMOS. The periphery contains the logic, such as the WSM, the sense amp circuitry, the I/O, etc.

A word about Intel StrataFlashTM memory: StrataFlashTM memory stores multiple bits per cell. The basic structure and operation of the cell does not change, except that the StrataFlashTM cell exploits the analog nature of charge storage to enable multiple VT levels, thus storing multiple bits. For example, by using four VT voltage levels, each cell can store two bits of information. The advantage is increased memory density and lower cost per bit.

Page 370: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 51

Aside: The Memory Hierarchy of a PC

registers

cacheL0L1L2

Main Memory

Hard Drive

External Memory(Tape, Floppy Disk, Diskette, CD, etc.)

internal to the microprocessor, made from basic logic gates (flip-flops), contains data the processor is currently using (e.g. operands for a calculation)

SRAM, internal to the microprocessor, contains data/instructions the processor thinks it will need again soon

DRAM, external to the processor but on the motherboard, contains data/instructions for operating system and programs that are running

not semiconductor memory (magnetic storage), not volatile, external to the motherboard, permanently stores the operating system, programs, files, etc.

not semiconductor memory (magnetic or optical storage), not volatile, portable, external to the PC

small

er ca

pacit

y, fas

ter, m

ore e

xpen

sive

large

r cap

acity

, den

ser,

chea

per,

slower

closer to processor

farther from processor

Page 371: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 52

This is a good place to look at the memory hierarchy of a personal computer (PC). As we ascend the hierarchy, we encounter smaller, faster, more expensive memories that are closer to the microprocessor, aka. central processing unit (CPU). As we descend the hierarchy, the memories become bigger (greater storage capacity), denser (more storage cells per unit area), cheaper (perbyte), and slower (longer access time/latency).

Registers are the smallest and fastest form of memory. They are inside the microprocessor, and store data the processor is currently using (e.g. operands for a calculation). Typically, there are a handful of general-purpose registers (as well as some dedicated registers not accessible to the programmer) inside a microprocessor.

A cache memory is a small SRAM inside the microprocessor (though L2 or L3 cache may be found outside the processor on the host bus in some systems). Cache stores instructions/data the processor thinks it will need again soon (how this is determined depends on the cache architecture). As discussed previously, SRAM is very fast memory, but expensive (in terms of silicon realestate). An L0 cache is smaller, faster, and closer to the processor than L1 cache. L1 is smaller, faster, and closer than L2. And so on. If the processor needs an instruction or some data, it will first search L0 and then L1 and then L2 and so on. If it can not find the instruction/data in cache, it will then access the Main Memory, discussed next. The number of cache levels is determined by the processor architecture, based on tradeoffs involving performance (speed) and cost (silicon real state and hardware complexity). Remember that cache is fast, but very small – for example, the Pentium® III (Coppermine) processor uses a 256 kb (kilobit) on-die L2 cache.

The Main Memory is DRAM, and is contained in SIMM’s (Single In-Line Memory Modules) or DIMM’s (Dual In-Line Memory Modules) on the PC motherboard. Because DRAM is very dense and cheap, the Main Memory has a much higher storage capacity than cache – for example, modern PC’s have 128 – 256 MB (megabytes) of Main Memory. The trade-off is that it is slower to access. If the requested instruction/data is found in the cache (called a “cache hit”), it can typically be retrieved in one clock cycle, whereas it might take many more cycles to retrieve it from Main Memory (on a “ cache miss”). This is why cache is used: if the processor can keep the most often used data in the nearby cache, it will spend less time accessing Main Memory, and the overall performance of the system will be much better. It should also be noted that advancements continue to be made in DRAM architecture to combat the Main Memory bottleneck, such as DDR-DRAM (Double Data Rate DRAM) and Rambus RDRAM – these technologies are focused on reducing memory access latency (the overhead delay in accessing data) and/or increasing memory bandwidth (bytes or words per second).

The Hard Drive is external to the motherboard but inside the PC. It is not semiconductor memory, but rather magnetic storage (and hence non-volatile). The hard drive has far greater storage capacity than the Main Memory – 30 GB (gigabytes) or more is common in modern PC’s. But again the trade-off is speed: if the processor has to access data on the Hard Drive and load it into Main Memory, this can take hundreds or thousands of clock cycles. The bottom of the hierarchy is External Memory such as diskettes and CD’s, which are portable memory devices that are not a permanent part of the PC. These devices are not semiconductor memory, but rather magnetic (tape or disk) or optical (CD) storage. These devices are convenient and have large storage capacity, but it takes the CPU a very long time to access data on them.

Why the hierarchy? The ideal memory would have enormous storage capacity, very fast data retrieval (low latency and high bandwidth), and low cost (small silicon real estate). The question arises: why not just build huge register banks, and do away with the rest of the hierarchy? The answer: not only would this be prohibitively large in silicon area (i.e. expensive, unmanufacturable), but it wouldn’t work – the more hardware (gates and wire) we add to a register bank (and the accompanying access circuitry such as the decoder, etc.), the slower it becomes. A similar argument holds for cache vs. Main Memory: it is not practical to make an SRAM the size of a DRAM Main Memory – not only is it prohibitively expensive, but the memory would be slowed down too much by its sheer size. Hence, the memory hierarchy is devised to present the processor with as close to an ideal memory as possible: large storage capacity (provided by the Main Memory) and fast access (because of the high cache hit rate) at a reasonable cost. Obviously, the cache architecture (number of cache levels, cache sizes, cache storage/retrieval algorithms, etc.) has a pronounced influence on the performance of the PC – the goal is to maximize cache capacity, hit rate, and bandwidth while minimizing cache latency. Minimizing the latency and maximizing the bandwidth of Main Memory is also very important, hence the development of DDR-DRAM, Rambus RDRAM, and other technologies.

* Flash memory is also used in the PC, though it doesn’t really fit into the context of the memory hierarchy discussed above. A Flash chip (card) is often used to store the BIOS (Basic Input/Output System) and other primitive data that the PC needs in order to boot-up. When the PC is turned on, it begins booting-up from the ROM BIOS, until it reaches a point where it can activate the hard drive and load the operating system followed by other programs (applications). Thus, the Flash ROM holds the seed information the PC needs at start-up. It is ideal for this application because (1) it is non-volatile memory (i.e. retains its data even when the power is turned off), and (2) the contents of the ROM are set at the time the PC is manufactured and are rarely changed (i.e. do not oftenwrite/reprogram the ROM, sometimes referred to as “firmware” for this reason). Also, as mentioned previously, Flash ROM finds widespread use in portable electronic devices such as mobile phones and PDAs.

Page 372: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 53

Transistor Scaling&

Technology Trends

Page 373: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 54

We have discussed how MOSFETs can be used to build logic and memory circuits, and some of the important circuit performance characteristics and trade-offs involved. We have also taken a big-picture view of how a large and complex circuit like a microprocessor is made. With this knowledge in hand, we now turn our attention to the topic of transistor scaling (methodologies for making smaller transistors and denser circuits) and a discussion of the technology trends in the semiconductor industry. It is important to understand the methods, challenges, and trade-offs involved in advancing the state of semiconductor technology.

Page 374: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 55

Optional Topic: Transistor / IC Scaling

Attributeor

Feature

Symbol Full (Constant

Field) Scaling factor (s > 1)

Comments:Strategy: Scale all physical device dimensions (L, Z, tOX, xj, etc.) AND all voltages (VDD, VDS, VGS, VT) uniformly by 1/s to produce a smaller transistor with the same large-channel behavior.

Constant Voltage Scaling factor (s > 1)

Comments:Strategy: Scale all physical device dimensions (L, Z, tOX, xj, etc.) by 1/s but do NOT scale the voltages (VDD, VDS, VGS, VT), e.g. in order to maintain compatibility with industry standard voltage specs or existing products and applications.

Channel length L 1/s Scale down all physical device dimensions by 1/s.

1/s Scale down all physical device dimensions by 1/s.

Channel width Z 1/s Scale down all physical device dimensions by 1/s.

1/s Scale down all physical device dimensions by 1/s.

Device area 1/s2 Area = ZL, scales down by 1/s2. 1/s2 Area = ZL, scales down by 1/s2. Packing density (devices per u. area)

s2 Die size reduced – improves yield and number of die on the wafer.

s2 Die size reduced – improves yield and number of die on the wafer.

S/D junction depth xj 1/s Scale down all physical device dimensions by 1/s. Junctions must be made shallower to preserve subgate electrostatics. (Increases source/drain series resistance.)

1/s Scale down all physical device dimensions by 1/s. Junctions must be made shallower to preserve subgate electrostatics. (Increases source/drain series resistance.)

Gate oxide thickness tOX 1/s Scale down all physical device dimensions by 1/s.

1/s Scale down all physical device dimensions by 1/s. (Note: May scale by less if this results in an unacceptably large vertical gate field. Large field increases susceptibility to oxide wearout, hot carrier effects, vertical field mobility degradation, gate leakage, and dielectric breakdown.)

Gate oxide capacitance COX 1/s Gate area (ZL) reduced by 1/s2 and tOX reduced by 1/s, so COX (=εOXZL/tOX) reduced by 1/s.

1/s Gate area (ZL) reduced by 1/s2 and tOX reduced by 1/s, so COX (=εOXZL/tOX) reduced by 1/s.

Gate oxide capacitance per unit area

C’OX s tOX reduced by 1/s (and gate area ignored), so C’OX (=εOX/tOX) increases by s.

s tOX reduced by 1/s (and gate area ignored), so C’OX (=εOX/tOX) increases by s

(chart continued ….)

samedifferent

Page 375: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 56

The semiconductor industry is continually shrinking transistor dimensions from one generation of CMOS process technology to the next, thus increasing device density (number of transistors per unit area). This density increase results in:

• Lower manufacturing cost. Increased transistor density means that the same functionality can be packed into a smaller chip (die) area. Smaller chips are less expensive to manufacture because more chips fit on each wafer, improving fab volume and throughput. (Note that most of the manufacturing cost is per wafer, not per chip.) The yield (percentage of functional chips) also improves dramatically as chip size is reduced.

• Improved chip performance. The performance improvement is realized at both the transistor level and the architecture/design level. Transistor speed (intrinsic switching speed and drive current) improves, increasing the maximum clock frequency of the circuitry. And architects and designers have a larger transistor budget with which to make “smarter” chips (more functionality) and faster chips (in terms of how fast the chip executes instructions or performs tasks).

Note the industry trend that microprocessor chip size (area) often increases from one generation to the next, even though transistor density is improving. This is driven by the desire to pack ever more functionality onto the chip, making it more powerful and faster in terms of instruction execution. The performance vs. yield trade-off must be managed when defining the chip size.

For these reasons, chips generally become denser, faster, smarter, and cheaper to manufacture (per bit or per unit performance) from one generation to the next. This continuous improvement intransistor density is described quantitatively by Moore’s Law, which is illustrated later in this module.

Therefore, it is worthwhile to address the topic of transistor scaling, i.e. methodologies for making transistors smaller. The goal of transistor scaling is to start with a MOSFET having reasonablygood large-geometry behavior, and uniformly miniaturize it such that this behavior is preserved; i.e. the subgate electrostatics can still be treated as quasi-one-dimensional, and small geometry behavior such as hot electron effects, DIBL, etc., are avoided even though the transistor is smaller. This is easier said than done. We will discuss two approaches to transistor scaling: full scaling(aka. constant field scaling), and constant voltage scaling. Scaling in a real manufacturing environment actually employs elements of both of these methodologies, with a healthy dose of other, more pragmatic scaling techniques as well. By studying these two fundamental methodologies, we’ll get a better picture of what’s involved in transistor scaling.

Using the chart provided here, we can compare and contrast the full (constant field) scaling and the constant voltage scaling methodologies. Line items that are the same between the two have a gray background. An explanation accompanies each item, to help you understand how things scale.

Full Scaling (Constant Field Scaling): The approach here is to scale all transistor physical dimensions by 1/s, where s is the desired scale factor (s > 1, e.g. s = 2 results in a 1/2 or 50% shrink). This includes reducing the gate dimensions (Z and L), making the gate oxide thinner (tOX), making the source and drain junctions shallower (xj), making the source/drain and isolation areas smaller, and scaling down the depletion region depths (W) inside the device (i.e. the source/drain-to-well and channel-to-well depletion region widths, which are scaled down by scaling up the well doping concentration). Thus every physical dimension and feature of the transistor, whether “vertical” or “horizontal”, is reduced in size by 1/s, yielding a uniform three-dimensional miniaturization of the MOSFET structure. The voltages are also scaled by 1/s, including the supply voltage which we will call VDD (which we assume supplies VDS and VGS) and the threshold voltage VT. By scaling all physical dimensions and all voltages by 1/s, the subgate electric field (shape and intensity) is maintained, and hence all subgate electrostatics are the same, so that the post-shrink MOSFET has the same long-channel behavior in principle as the original MOSFET, and can be described using the same models.

Constant Voltage Scaling: The approach here is to scale all transistor physical dimensions by 1/s, as above, but not to scale the voltages. The reason for keeping the voltages the same is usually one of necessity, e.g. to adhere to an industry standard voltage spec, or to maintain voltage compatibility with existing products or applications. Because of this, constant voltage scaling (or elements thereof) is generally of more widespread use than full scaling. Of course, by changing the physical dimensions and not the applied voltages, the subgate electric field will change (intensity and shape) as will all subgate electrostatics, and thus the behavior of the transistor will deviate from its pre-shrink model (e.g. two- and three-dimensional effects become more pronounced in the treatment of subgate electrostatics, and small geometry behavior such as hot electron effects, DIBL, etc., play a larger role).

Page 376: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 57

Transistor / IC Scaling (cont.)

Attribute or

Feature

Symbol Full (Constant

Field) Scaling factor (s > 1)

Comments: Strategy: Scale all physical device dimensions (L, Z, tOX, xj, etc.) AND all voltages (VDD, VDS, VGS, VT) uniformly by 1/s to produce a smaller transistor with the same large-channel behavior.

Constant Voltage Scaling factor (s > 1)

Comments: Strategy: Scale all physical device dimensions (L, Z, tOX, xj, etc.) by 1/s but do NOT scale the voltages (VDD, VDS, VGS, VT), e.g. in order to maintain compatibility with industry standard voltage specs or existing products and applications.

Supply voltage VDD 1/s VDD is scaled down by 1/s to preserve subgate electric field (intensity and shape) and subgate electrostatics. (Note: VDD is assumed to supply the transistor voltages VDS and VGS.)

1 VDD not scaled, e.g. to maintain compatibility with industry standard voltage specs or existing products and applications. (Note: VDD is assumed to supply the transistor voltages VDS and VGS.)

Electric field intensity εεεε 1 Field remains constant (shape and intensity) b/c all dimensions (L, Z, tOX, xj, W, etc.) and voltages (VGS, VDS, VT) scaled down by 1/s. Post-shrink subgate electrostatics approx. the same as pre-shrink, hence large-channel MOSFET characteristics preserved.

s Field strength increases by factor of s because physical dimensions (L, Z, tOX, xj, etc.) scaled down by 1/s but voltages (VGS, VDS, VT) are not scaled. Post-shrink subgate electrostatics are now different from pre-shrink, and device behavior changes.

Substrate/well doping concentration

NA s Scale depletion region depth W (S/D-to-well and channel-to-well) down by 1/s, to preserve subgate electrostatics. Since W ~ √(V/NA), can do this by scaling NA up by s and VDD down by 1/s.

s Scale depletion region depth W (S/D-to-well and channel-to-well) down by 1/s, to preserve subgate electrostatics. Since W ~ √(V/NA), can do this by scaling NA up by s and VDD down by 1/s.

Threshold voltage VT ~1/s Because all device dimensions/features and voltages scale by 1/s, it follows that VT also scales by ~1/s. (VT adjust implant can be used to achieve desired VT value.)

~1 VDS and VGS (assumed equal to VDD) are not scaled, and neither is VT. (VT adjust implant can be used to achieve desired VT value.)

Body factor coefficient γ 1/√s γ ~ (√NA)/C’OX . NA and C’OX are both scaled up by s, so γ is reduced by 1/√s.

1/√s γ ~ (√NA)/C’OX . NA and C’OX are both scaled up by s, so γ is reduced by 1/√s.

Drain current ID ~1/s ID ~ (Z/L)µeffC’OX[(VGS-VT)VDS] (square law theory, linear regime). Since both terms in the bracket scale down as 1/s, and C’OX scales up by s (and the 1/s scaling of Z and L cancels out in Z/L), it follows that ID scales down as 1/s.

s ID ~ (Z/L)µeffC’OX[(VGS-VT)VDS] (square law theory, linear regime). Since the voltage terms do not scale, and C’OX scales up by s (and the 1/s scaling of Z and L cancels out in Z/L), it follows that ID scales up by s.

(chart continued ….)

samedifferent

Page 377: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 58

We see that all the physical dimensions are scaled down by 1/s in both methodologies, hence all items depending purely on device dimensions are shown in gray on the chart. Shrinking the dimensions of lithographically-defined features, such as the gate length L, present ever-increasing challenges for photolithography and etch technologies. Of particular concern is the optical phenomenon of diffraction, whereby light “spreads out” as it passes through a small (relative to the wavelength) opening, such as a feature on the photomask. This makes it harder to resolve small features, and ultimately limits the feature size and transistor density. Because feature dimensions shrink faster than the wavelength of UV light used for photolithography, diffraction becomes an increasing limiter. Improvements in UV light sources and optics (e.g. laser sources, lens improvements, etc.), photoresist and developer chemistry (e.g. chemically-amplified photoresists, etc.), and photomask technology (e.g. optical proximity correction, phase-shift masks, etc.) help to combat the effects of diffraction. Future exposure sources having smaller wavelengths than UV - such as x-ray, electron, and ion sources - are under consideration, but this requires fundamental changes in the optics, photomasks, and photoresists as well. Advances in etch technology also improve feature resolution, by enabling high-aspect-ratio etching and vertical sidewall profiles. Because smaller and denser features can be destroyed by smaller particles, continuous improvements in cleanroom technology, defect metrology, and process equipment are also required.

Also of interest is the scaling of the source and drain junction depths -- this is necessary in order to maintain the one-dimensional treatment of the channel field/charge. If the junction depths were not scaled, the relative increase in source and drain sidewall area adjacent to the channel region would make the subgate field/charge profile deviate toward a two-dimensional model. In order to preserve good MOSFET characteristics, the source and drain junctions must be scaled along with the rest of the dimensions. From a manufacturing standpoint, it is not easy to make shallow junctions. Dopant channeling can be minimized by performing angled implants (to avoid channeling paths in the silicon crystal lattice) and/or using pre-amorphization implants (implanting Si or Ge into the silicon substrate surface, rendering it amorphous and thus destroying any crystalline channeling paths; a subsequent anneal will heal the surface damage and return it to single-crystal structure). Another common technique is the use of heavier dopant atoms which have a shallower implant depth and diffuse less rapidly (e.g. using In or BF2 instead of B for shallow P-type implants). And care must be taken not to silicide through the shallow junction, as silicon is consumed in the silicidation reaction -- hence the advantage of having a heavily-doped tip to preserved good channel characteristics, adjacent to a deeper “bulk” source/drain region which lowers the source/drain resistance and can be silicided safely.

Another line item of particular interest is the scaling of the gate oxide. It is challenging to grow an ultra-thin, high-quality gate oxide uniformly over the wafer surface. Thinner oxides are more susceptible to defects/pinholes, gate oxide wearout, ESD (electrostatic discharge) damage, dielectric breakdown, and gate leakage (tunnel) current. Remember: the gate oxide is the heart of the transistor, and must be of the highest quality and uniformity.

Other courses discuss in greater detail the challenges associated with fabricating smaller device features.

Of course, any line item that depends on voltage will be different between the two methodologies (non-gray background on chart), because constant voltage scaling does not scale the applied voltages. Observe from the chart that the electric field strength is not scaled in the full (constant field) methodology, but increases by s in the constant voltage methodology (because the physical dimensions have shrunk but the applied voltages have not, resulting in a larger field). This non-scaled field will cause the device to deviate from its pre-shrink behavior, by exacerbating two-dimensional channel effects and small-geometry effects (hot electron, DIBL, etc.).

Notice also that the threshold voltage VT is scaled in the full scaling methodology, but is not scaled in the constant voltage methodology. The drain current ID scales down as 1/s for full scaling, but increases as s for the constant voltage scaling (due to the larger fields presented by both VGS and VDS, which are assumed to be supplied by VDD). This would appear to be an advantage, as higher drive current implies higher circuit speed. However, it comes at the price of increased two-dimensional channel behavior, exaggerated small-geometry effects, increased power consumption, and increased reliability risk. Therefore, while increased drive current is desirable, the trade-offs must be carefully managed. Also note that the subthreshold swing voltage, S, does not scale, i.e. the ID-VGS curve in weak and moderate inversion remains the same. At the same time, the supply voltage is reduced (for constant field scaling), meaning that the gate voltage reduction required to turn the transistor off is a larger fraction of the total bias voltage range, hence noise margins are reduced.

Page 378: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 59

Attributeor

Feature

Symbol Full (Constant

Field) Scaling factor (s > 1)

Comments:Strategy: Scale all physical device dimensions (L, Z, tOX, xj, etc.) AND all voltages (VDD, VDS, VGS, VT) uniformly by 1/s to produce a smaller transistor with the same large-channel behavior.

Constant Voltage Scaling factor (s > 1)

Comments:Strategy: Scale all physical device dimensions (L, Z, tOX, xj, etc.) by 1/s but do NOT scale the voltages (VDD, VDS, VGS, VT), e.g. in order to maintain compatibility with industry standard voltage specs or existing products and applications.

DC power consumption PDC ~1/s2 PDC = IDVDD. VDD and ID decrease by 1/s, hence PDC decreases by 1/s2.

~s PDC = IDVDD. VDD not scaled and ID increases by s, hence so does PDC.

DC power consumption per unit chip area

1 PDC decreases by 1/s2 and area decreases by 1/s2, so PDC/A ≈ 1.

~s3 PDC increases by s and area decreases by 1/s2, so PDC/A increases by s3.

Transistor switching time ~1/s ID is reduced by 1/s but so is COX, i.e. there is less current to charge proportionally less capacitance, so these effects cancel. But the capacitances only need to be charged to a VDD which has been scaled down by 1/s, hence the 1/s reduction in transistor switching time.

~1/s2 ID increases by s while COX decreases by 1/s (i.e. there is more current available to charge less capacitance), hence the transistor switching time decreases by 1/s2. (Note that VDD is not scaled, so the capacitances must still be charged to the original VDD value.)

Gate delay ~1/s Tracks transistor switching time. ~1/s2 Tracks transistor switching time. Transistor power-delay product

1/s3 Power decreases as 1/s2 and delay decreases as 1/s, so power-delay product decreases as 1/s3.

~1/s Power increases as s and delay decreases as 1/s2, so power-delay product decreases as 1/s.

Metal line width 1/s Note: If scale the transistors but not the interconnects, can not realize die size reduction!

1/s Note: If scale the transistors but not the interconnects, can not realize die size reduction!

Metal line thickness 1/s Height reduction often required by fab process to maintain metal line aspect ratio (otherwise they become too tall and narrow to fabricate reliably). (Though scaling is typically less than 1/s in practice.)

1/s Height reduction often required by fab process to maintain metal line aspect ratio (otherwise they become too tall and narrow to fabricate reliably). (Though scaling is typically less than 1/s in practice.)

Metal line cross-sectional area

1/s2 Width and thickness both reduced by 1/s. 1/s2 Width and thickness both reduced by 1/s.

Metal line resistance R ~s R = ρL/A. Assuming line/trace lengths also reduced by ~1/s, line resistance increases by ~s.

~s R = ρL/A. Assuming line/trace lengths also reduced by ~1/s, line resistance increases by ~s.

Transistor / IC Scaling (cont.)

(chart continued ….)

samedifferent

Page 379: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 60

The DC power consumption of the transistor is reduced for full scaling (because the current and voltage are both scaled down), but the power consumption per unit silicon area does not scale (because the device power scales down as 1/s2 but so does the area). For the case of constant voltage scaling, the power consumption scales up (because the current scales up and the supply voltage remains constant), and the power per unit area scales up strongly (because the device power scales up while the area scales down). This discussion refers to DC power consumption (i.e. a current ID flowing across a source-to-drain voltage drop of VDD when the transistor is held in the “on” state). Dynamic (AC) power consumption tends to increase from one generation to the next, due mostly to the increased clock frequency.

On the subject of power, note that supply voltages trend downward over time, as necessitated by smaller transistors and thinner gate oxides for reliability reasons, and the desire to maintain constant fields or at least minimize/control increases in field strength. At the same time, the device density trends upward. The upshot is more devices drawing AC power from a smaller supply, which leads to more power supply variation (noise) and makes the task of distributing stable power to the IC doubly more difficult. (Many devices switching simultaneously places large AC current demands on the supply to provide the required charge, and can cause the supply voltage to “droop” as it struggles to supply enough current and then “overshoot” later if the demand suddenly drops -- this variation in the supply voltage is called supply noise. Design techniques exist for minimizing and/or tolerating supply noise, but it becomes more challenging as the semiconductor technology advances.)

The transistor switching time and gate delay are reduced by scaling (with a stronger reduction for constant voltage scaling -- see the chart for details). This results in a speed improvement for the circuit -- assuming it is not RC limited, which brings us to a discussion of scaling the interconnects ….

If the transistors are scaled down but the interconnect circuitry is not, no reduction in die size is realized. Hence, it is necessary to scale down the interconnects as well as the transistors. A reduction in metal line width usually necessitates some reduction in metal thickness as well, to preserve a manufacturable aspect ratio (otherwise the metal lines become too tall and narrow to manufacture reliably). Scaling down the metal line width and thickness reduces the cross-sectional area and increases the resistance. The current density increases, as shown on the chart, resulting in more resistive heating and greater susceptibility to electromigration (a phenomenon that forms voids in the metal lines over time, hence posing a reliability risk).

Page 380: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 61

Attributeor

Feature

Symbol Full (Constant

Field) Scaling factor (s > 1)

Comments:Strategy: Scale all physical device dimensions (L, Z, tOX, xj, etc.) AND all voltages (VDD, VDS, VGS, VT) uniformly by 1/s to produce a smaller transistor with the same large-channel behavior.

Constant Voltage Scaling factor (s > 1)

Comments:Strategy: Scale all physical device dimensions (L, Z, tOX, xj, etc.) by 1/s but do NOT scale the voltages (VDD, VDS, VGS, VT), e.g. in order to maintain compatibility with industry standard voltage specs or existing products and applications.

Metal line current density

s Current (ID) decreases by 1/s but cross-sectional area decreases by 1/s2. Hence current density increases by s. Susceptibility to electromigration and resistive heating increases.

s3 Current (ID) increases by s and cross-sectional area decreases by 1/s2. Hence current density increases by s3. Susceptibility to electromigration and resistive heating increases.

Voltage drop on metal line

~1 Resistance increases by s and current through the line decreases by 1/s, hence voltage drop on metal line does not scale (V = IR). Percentage-wise, this means more “wasted” voltage (dropped on metal line), less doing actual work (dropped across transistor).

s2 Resistance increases by s and current through the line increases by s, hence voltage drop on metal line increases by s2 (V = IR). Percentage-wise, this means more “wasted” voltage (dropped on metal line), less doing actual work (dropped across transistor).

Metal line parasitic capacitance

C 1/s Width of metal line reduced by 1/s decreases surface area by 1/s, which reduces parasitic metal-to-metal overlap capacitance by 1/s. Thickness of metal line reduced by 1/s reduces metal sidewall-to-sidewall capacitance by 1/s also.

1/s Width of metal line reduced by 1/s decreases surface area by 1/s, which reduces parasitic metal-to-metal overlap capacitance by 1/s. Thickness of metal line reduced by 1/s reduces metal sidewall-to-sidewall capacitance by 1/s also.

Metal line RC time constant

RC ~1 Resistance is increased by s but capacitance is decreased by 1/s, hence RC time constant roughly the same. This is bad for long lines: it can prevent us from taking advantage of the improved transistor switching speed (i.e. the circuit speed is becoming RC limited).

~1 Resistance is increased by s but capacitance is decreased by 1/s, hence RC time constant roughly the same. This is bad for long lines: it can prevent us from taking advantage of the improved transistor switching speed (i.e. the circuit speed is becoming RC limited).

Transistor / IC Scaling (cont.)

(chart continued ….)

samedifferent

Page 381: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 62

The interconnect capacitances tend to be reduced, because the metal-to-metal overlap area and metal sidewall area are reduced. Because the resistance scales up by about the same amount as the capacitance scales down, the RC product in principle remains about the same*. This implies that ICs will become progressively more RC limited from one generation to the next -- i.e. the transistor switching speed is improving while the interconnect RC delay remains roughly the same. As discussed previously, this has resulted in the industry’s migration to copper interconnects (lower resistance) and low-k interlayer dielectrics (lower capacitance) to reduce RC delay and take full advantage of the transistor performance improvements.

* For global wires (long wires that run across all or most of the chip), the RC delay tends to become worse from one microprocessor generation to the next because the chip size tends to increase as discussed previously, making global lines longer.

Page 382: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 63

Transistor / IC Scaling (cont.)

Attributeor

Feature

Symbol Full (Constant

Field) Scaling factor (s > 1)

Comments:Strategy: Scale all physical device dimensions (L, Z, tOX, xj, etc.) AND all voltages (VDD, VDS, VGS, VT) uniformly by 1/s to produce a smaller transistor with the same large-channel behavior.

Constant Voltage Scaling factor (s > 1)

Comments:Strategy: Scale all physical device dimensions (L, Z, tOX, xj, etc.) by 1/s but do NOT scale the voltages (VDD, VDS, VGS, VT), e.g. in order to maintain compatibility with industry standard voltage specs or existing products and applications.

Contact/via area 1/s2 Reduction of each side of contact/via “window” opening by 1/s results in a reduction in area of 1/s2.

1/s2 Reduction of each side of contact/via “window” opening by 1/s results in a reduction in area of 1/s2.

Contact/via current density

s The current (ID) scales as 1/s and the contact area scales as 1/s2, therefore the current density scales as s (J = I/A).

s3 The current (ID) scales as s and the contact area scales as 1/s2, therefore the current density scales as s3 (J = I/A).

Contact/via resistance s2 Contact/via “window” opening reduced by 1/s2 results in resistance increase as s2. (neglecting any change in via/contact height/depth that may result from changes in ILD thickness).

s2 Reduced contact/via “window” opening (neglecting any change in via/contact height/depth that may result from changes in ILD thickness).

Contact/via voltage drop s The current (ID) scales as 1/s but the contact/via resistance scales as s2, hence the voltage drop across the contact/via scales by s (V = IR) – opposite the direction of the voltage (VDD) scaling! Larger voltage drop across smaller contacts leads to reliability concerns.

s3 The current (ID) scales as s and the contact/via resistance scales as s2, hence the voltage drop across the contact/via scales as s3 (V = IR). Larger voltage drop across smaller contacts leads to reliability concerns.

samedifferent

Page 383: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 64

The contact/via resistance also scales up, due to the reduction of the contact/via cross-sectional area. Therefore, the industry is moving toward copper-filled vias, which have a lower resistance than traditional tungsten vias. Using copper vias in combination with copper metal lines results in a large reduction in overall interconnect resistance.

For a broader and more indepth summary of IC scaling trends and challenges, the interested reader is referred to chapter 1 of the text: Digital Systems Engineering, by W.J. Dally and J.W. Poulton, Cambridge U. Press, 1998. Also, chapter 5 of the text: Operation and Modeling of the MOS Transistor, by Y.P. Tsividis, McGraw-Hill, 1987.

Page 384: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 65

Pulling It All Together: Intel® Microprocessors4004

386

Pentium® II

Pentium® 4

(note: not to scale wrt. one another)

Page 385: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 66

A microprocessor is a good example of a very large and complex digital circuit that contains a lot of logic and memory. This is a good place to pull the concepts from all five modules together for a final, big-picture review and summary.

• The silicon chip contains a millions of transistors (MOSFETs) which act like microscopic switches. By understanding the electronic properties of silicon itself, PN junctions, and the MOS Capacitor, we can understand how a MOSFET works. This is the primary goal of this course.

• These transistors can be connected together to form various logic gates. A logic gate is a small group of transistors that performs some elementary logic operation. We studied five logic gates: inverter, AND, NAND, OR, NOR. Larger circuits (e.g. our burglar alarm control circuit, our decoder, or parts of a microprocessor) can then be constructed from logic gates. By understanding how transistors work, we can understand how these logic gates work.

• Transistors can also be connected to make memory cells. A memory cell is a small collection of transistors that stores a bit (0 or 1). Large memories can be constructed using an array of memory cells. There are different types of memory cells, employing different techniques for storing a bit. We studied three memory cells: DRAM, SRAM, and Flash EEPROM. Again, by understanding how transistors work, we can understand how these memory cells work.

• Finally, we took a big-picture view of how a complex integrated circuit or “chip” is born. A circuit is created by design engineers and its functionality is verified through simulation. The circuit is then laid out for silicon. There are many computer-based design tools involved in the design process, and it is necessary to divide large, complex chips into a collection of smaller blocks and sub-blocks that can be designed by an individual or small team. The transistor-level layout is “fractured” into layers (e.g. poly, metal-1, etc.), and this fractured database is used to make the photomask set. The fab uses these photomasks to manufacture the chips on silicon wafers using a layer-by-layer fabrication process (other courses describe this process in detail). The chips are then assembled (packaged). The chips are electrically tested at various stages of the manufacturing process.

A Brief History of Intel® Microprocessors:

A few Intel® microprocessors are shown for example (the pictures are not to scale wrt. one another). The 4004 was the world’s first microprocessor. It was introduced in 1971, and used primarily in calculators by a company called Busicom. It consisted of 2,300 transistors manufactured on a 10-micron process, and ran at 108 kHz.

The Intel® 8086 was introduced in 1978, having 29,000 transistors on a 3.0-micron process, and running at 5 – 10 MHz. It was selected by IBM to be the microprocessor in the first personal computer. The 80186 was introduced in 1982 and was used mostly in microcontroller applications. The Intel® 286 (80286) was introduced in 1982 as a general-purpose microprocessor for personal computers. It contained 132,000 transistors fabricated on a 1.5-micron process, and ran at 6 – 15 MHz.

The Intel® 386 (80386) was introduced in 1985. The introductory version contained 275,000 transistors fabricated using a 1.5-micron process, and later 1.0-micron. It was introduced at 16 MHz, and reached speeds as high as 33 MHz in its lifetime. The Intel® 486 was introduced in 1989 with 1.2 million transistors on a 1.0-micron process, later 0.8-micron. It had clock speeds up to 66 MHz in its lifetime.

The Pentium® processor was introduced in 1993 with 3+ million transistors on a 0.5-micron process, later 0.35-micron. Pentium® with MMXTM was introduced in 1997 with 4.5 million transistors on a 0.35-micron process, later 0.25-micron. The various versions of Pentium®/MMXTM reached clock speeds around 300 MHz. The Pentium® II processor was introduced in 1997. It had 7.5 million transistors and was fabricated on a 0.35-micron process (Klamath), and later 0.25-micron (Deschutes). It had clock speeds ranging from 233 to 450 MHz in its lifetime. The Pentium® III processor was introduced in 1999 with 9.5 million transistors on a 0.25-micron process (Katmai) and speeds up to 600 MHz, and later that year with 28 million transistors and on-die L2 cache on a 0.18-micron process (Coppermine) and speeds in excess of 1 GHz. Pentium® 4 (Willamette) was introduced at the end of 2000 with a whopping 40+ million transistors on a 0.18-micron process, at initial speeds of 1.4 and 1.5 GHz.

Page 386: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 67

Intel® Microprocessors & Moore’s Law

1,000

10,000

100,000

1,000,000

10,000,000

Jan-70 Jan-72 Jan-74 Jan-76 Jan-78 Jan-80 Jan-82 Jan-84 Jan-86 Jan-88 Jan-90 Jan-92 Jan-94 Jan-96 Jan-98

Intro Date

Num

ber o

f Tra

nsis

tors

double every year

every 2 yrs

every 1.5 yrs every 2.5 yrs

4004

8008 80808085

8086

8088

8018680286

80386

80486 8048680486

P1

PMMx

PPro

P2

Page 387: SemiconductorDevicePhysics_4pt3 [Sze]

Introduction to Semiconductor Device Physics / Small Circuits / rev 4.3 Tom Cunningham 5 - 68

Moore's Law was first published by Intel® co-founder Gordon Moore in 1965. Originally suggesting that processor complexity (transistor density) doubles every year, the law was revised in 1975 to suggest a doubling every 1.5 - 2 years.

This graph shows the number of transistors for each Intel® microprocessor (up through Pentium® II) vs. the date on which it was introduced. The solid lines depict the rate of doubling every year, 1.5 years, 2 years, and 2.5 years, for reference. Note that early on, it looked like a doubling every 1 - 1.5 years. In more recent times, it appears to double about every 1.5 – 2 years.

Moore’s law has important implications for the microelectronics industry. It predicts the continuation of smaller transistors and denser chips - which translates either into smaller chips or smarter chips, depending on whether the density gain is used to reduce die size or to increase the transistor budget (or typically, a little of both). Making the chips smaller has big advantages in terms of volume and yield, which amounts to lower manufacturing cost. Shrinking the transistors has advantages in terms of performance (faster circuitry and, typically, a larger transistor budget for the architects and designers). No other industry in history has seen this rate of performance gain and simultaneous cost reduction (per unit performance). For example, if the history of the automotive industry followed Moore’s law, your car would get 10,000 miles to the gallon, and it would be cheaper to throw it away than to park it.

* Note that these transistor counts are not normalized to their effective (core) die sizes, and hence do not represent transistor density per se. Also note that this is one family of microprocessors from one company; chips from other manufacturers, and other types of chips such as DRAMs, DSPs, etc., could also be plotted to get a more accurate picture of the industry as a whole.